Owner’s Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Owner’s Manual
Saab 9-3 M2005
Safety 11
Security 41
9-3 Convertible 55
Instruments and controls 77
Interior equipment 121
Starting and driving 145
Car care 197
Customer Assistance and Information 261
Technical data 267
Index 283
© Saab Automobile AB 2004
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
WARNING
Failure to heed warnings may cause
personal injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE texts warns of potential damage
to the car if the recommendations are not
followed.
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
ratemodificationsandtoalterspecifications
during production without prior notice.
If you have any questions concerning your
car, its equipment, the warranty conditions,
etc., your Saab dealer will be pleased to
help, or you may call the Saab Customer
Assistance Center in the U.S. at 1-800-955-
9007 or email them at saab-
We recommend that you read through the
manual before taking the car out for the first
time and keep it in the car for future refer-
ence.
To find a specific item, use the overviews
given on page 3–6. A list of content is given
at the beginning of each section of the man-
ual, and there is also a comprehensive
index at the back of the book.
Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Ser-
vice Record booklet which contains impor-
tant warranty information and specifies the
regular maintenance to be carried out. Also
included is a Quick Reference Guide, an
Infotainment System manual, tire warran-
tiesand(U.S.customers),adealerdirectory
with Roadside Assistance Program infor-
mation.
Introduction
This manual provides practical guidance on
driving and caring for your Saab.
The Saab 9-3 will be available with the fol-
lowing engine variants:
[email protected]. In Canada, please
contact the Saab Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-263-1999.
• 2.0t 175 hp
• 2.0 Turbo 210 hp
Although this manual describes the most
important differences between model vari-
ants, it does not specify the equipment or
features included on individual models.
Importation and distribution of Saab auto-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are
handledexclusivelybySaabCarsUSA,Inc.
in the United States and by General Motors
of Canada Limited in Canada.
Enjoy the road ahead!
Saab Automobile AB
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,
exchange parts or accessories that are not
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Instrument panel
Fuel gauge __________________
Odometer and trip meter________
Speedometer ________________
Tachometer__________________
Temperature gauge____________
Turbo gauge _________________
Warning and indicator lights _____
85
83
83
82
84
84
78
Clock _______________________
Profiler ______________________
Saab Information Display (SID) ___
92
87
87
Cruise Control___________ 165
Direction indicators _______ 98
High/low beam control stalk
97
Replacing wiper blades ___ 211
Washers and wipers______ 100
Washer fluid ____________ 211
Changing bulbs__________ 213
Front fog lights___________ 98
Headlight levelling________ 96
High/low beam __________ 97
Parking lights____________ 96
Rear fog light____________ 98
Automatic climate control __ 108
Car care and maintenance_ 257
Hazard warning lights_____
99
Manual climate control ____ 103
Seat heating____________ 107
Seat heating, ACC _______ 116
Ashtray _____________________ 132
Cigarette lighter _______________ 132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Exterior
Maximum loads _______________ 268
Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 188
Roof load ____________________ 188
Hood _______________________ 198
Washing the engine bay_________ 252
Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 254
Body __________________ 253
Service program _________ 262
Sunroof ________________ 126
Touching up paintwork ____ 253
Washing _______________ 252
Waxing and polishing _____ 253
Changing bulbs _________ 213
Dipswitch ______________
Direction indicators_______
96
98
Headlight levelling (xenon) _
Headlight switches _______
96
96
Headlight washers _______ 211
Brake lights _____________ 220
Changing bulbs__________ 213
Light switches ___________ 96
Taillights _______________ 220
Central locking __________
Child safety locks ________
Lock buttons____________
Trunk lock______________
42
46
42
45
Folding down the rear seat _ 140
Lighting ________________ 220
Load-through hatch_______ 142
Spare wheel ____________ 144
Tools __________________ 144
Trunk__________________ 140
Braking _____________________ 166
Changing wheels______________ 248
Spare wheel _________________ 246
Tire pressure ________________ 277
Tires _______________________ 234
Wheels _____________________ 275
Winter driving ________________ 181
Economical motoring _____ 179
Fuel filler door __________ 153
Fuel gauge _____________
85
Fuel grade _____________ 271
Refueling ______________ 153
Towing_________________ 190
Towing hook eyes ________ 190
Towing a trailer __________ 184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Interior
Interior rearview mirror _________ 135
Vanity mirror _________________ 130
Door mirrors__________________ 134
Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 225
Interior light switches ___________ 129
Sunroof _____________________ 126
Airbag _________________ 29
Steering wheel adjustment _ 122
Steering _______________ 273
Child safety locks ________
Child seats _____________
Safety belt care _________ 251
Safety belts ____________ 12
29
46
22
Fuses _________________ 227
Electric windows _________ 123
Glove box ______________ 132
Storage compartments____ 132
Automatic transmission ___ 159
Changing gears _________ 158
Manual transmission _____ 158
Child seats ________________
Folding down the rear seat ____
Rear seat__________________
Safety belts ________________
Seat adjustment ____________
Seat heating _______________
22
140
140
12
Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 132
Break-In Period _______________ 157
Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 181
Ignition switch ________________ 146
Parking brake_________________ 173
Parking _____________________ 173
Starting the engine ____________ 148
17
107,
116
251
Upholstery care_____________
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Engine bay
Changing engine oil____________ 203
Engine: description ____________ 199
Engine: technical data __________ 270
Important considerations for driving 150
Oil grade and viscosity__________ 270
Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 205
Driving in hot climates __________ 183
Radiator_____________________ 270
Temperature gauge ____________
84
Color code______________ 278
Engine number __________ 278
Gearbox number _________ 278
ABS brakes_____________ 166
Brake pads _____________ 206
Brake system ___________ 274
Brake fluid______________ 206
Warning labels __________
7
Vehicle identification number 278
Alternator ______________ 210
Drive belt_______________ 210
Exhaust emission control __ 151
Ignition system __________ 272
Simple troubleshooting
(A/C, ACC)_____________ 257
Changing a fuse_________ 227
Fuse table _____________ 232
Fuses _________________ 227
Relays ________________ 232
Spark plugs_____________ 272
Turbo gauge ____________ 84
Topping-up fluid _________ 211
Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 100
Washer fluid ____________ 211
Washer jets ____________ 212
Engine oil: checking level __ 202
Automatic transmission _________ 159
Transmission: technical data _____ 272
Manual transmission ___________ 158
Power steering________________ 207
Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 207
Battery ______________________ 208
Battery charge ________________ 208
Jump starting _________________ 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Warning labels
Radiator fan:
Radiator fan may start at any
time.
A/C system:
Refrigerant at high pressure.
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C
system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be
serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-
ual.
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Charge: 680 g R134a.
Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.
Saab oil 4759106
LEVEL INDICATOR
INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU
DARK
/
NOIR
OK
CLEAR
CLAIR
LOW
BAS
DANGER/POISON
No sparks, flames or smoking.
700 CCA (SAE)
DANGER/POISON
700 CCA (SAE)
•
•
•
•
Flush eyes immediatly with water
Get medical help fast.
•
•
Éviter les étincelles et les flammes. Ne pas fumer.
•
•
Rincer immédiatement les yeux avec de
l'oau Consulter un médecin rapidement.
Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury.
Protéger les yeux car les gaz explosife peuvent
causer la cécité ou des blessures.
Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
Ne pas pencher ni ouvrir la batterie.
•
Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe
burns.
KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN.
•
L'acide sulfurique peut causer la cécité ou des
brûlures graves.
GARDER HORS DE LA PORTÉE DES
ENFANTS
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY-P/N 53 52 000
12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)
BATTERIE SANS ENTRETIEN-P/N 53 52 000
12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)
Saab Automobile AB 53 53 057 Manufactured by Tudor Spain (Exide Technologies)
12102-EP
Saab Automobile AB 53 53 085 Fabriquée par Tudor Espagne (Exide Technologies)
12103-EP
Battery:
• No sparks, flames or smoking
• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury
• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns
• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast
• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery
Coolant:
Never open when engine hot!
CANADA
NETTOYERLEBOUCHON
DE REMPLISSAGE
AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.
UTILISER SEULEMENT
DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-
ENANT D’UN CONTE-
NANT SCELLÉ.
• NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING
• SHIELD EYES
• KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN
• ACID
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• EXPLOSIVE GAS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Jack
• Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting
tire snow chains.
• Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm
and level ground.
• Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.
JACKING INSTRUCTION
USA
1
Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be
changed.
3
Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.
4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts
one-half turn.
5
6
7
Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so
wheel is not loose.
Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross
sequence.
CANADA
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the airbag
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front
• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS
Contact a Saab dealer if a
xenon headlight requires
replacement.
Changing wheels:
This label is only found on
cars with xenon headlights.
Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load
2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do
not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,
use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Example of symbols that can be found in your car
No sparks,
flames or
smoking
Windshield
wipers
Coolant tem-
perature
Buckle up
Airbag
Headlights
Radiator fan
Fuel
Refer to
the Owner’s
Manual
Direction
indicators
Windshield
washers
No charge to
battery
Never place a
rear-facing
child seat in
this seat
Shield eyes
Parking lights
Defroster
Foot brake
Keep out of
reach of
children
Electric
windows
Hazard warn-
ing lights
Rear window
heating
Coolant level
Battery acid
contains sul-
phuric acid
Deactivating
ofrearwindow
switches
Front fog
lights
Engine oil
pressure
Cabin fan
Risk of
explosive gas
Central
locking, lock
Rear fog light
ABS brakes
Central
locking,
unlock
Electronic
Stability
Program
Trunk lid,
opening
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Safety
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are
provided for all seats.
Safety belts
The results of studies show that it is equally
important to wear safety belts in the rear
seat as in the front seats.
WARNING
• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt
before driving off so that you can pay
full attention to the traffic.
Safety belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the safety
belt reminder in the main instrument panel
will come on if the driver has not buckled up.
In addition an audible signal sounds for 4–
8 seconds, or until the driver fastens his
belt.
The front seat passenger is reminded to
buckle up by the Saab Information Display
(SID).
• Safety belts must be worn at all times
by all occupants.
• Child safety, see page 22.
• Check that the locking tongue is prop-
erly locked in the belt lock.
Driver seat safety belt reminder
• In the event of a crash, a rear-seat
passenger not wearing a safety belt
will be thrown forward against the
front-seat backrests. The stresses
imposed on the front seat passengers
and belts are multiplied and can result
in needless injury or even death for all
car occupants.
Use your seatbelt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
13
is advisable to remove thick items of
clothing.
• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan
necessary, as the safety belt provides
better protection when the seat is in the
more upright position.
Correct position for safety belt
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is
extremely important.
• Only one person per safety belt!
• Anoutofpositionsafetybeltcanresult
in the wearer sliding underneath the
belt in a crash (submarining) and
injury can result from the lap portion
cutting into the abdomen.
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,
theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are
applied hard or a crash occurs.
• Never fasten the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind the body or pull
the belt off the shoulder and under the
arm.
• Children up to 6 years of age must always
be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-
mends the use of a child seat for children
up to the age of 10.
• Children who have grown out of a child
seat should be restrained by the car’s
standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
Correct seating position
• Two people must never share one
safety belt. In the event of a crash
thosesharingabeltriskbeingcrushed
together and injured.
Consider this:
• Position the lap strap snugly and low
across the hips so that it just touches the
thighs.
The shoulder strap must be as far in on
the shoulder as possible.
• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted
or rubbing against any sharp edges.
• There should not be any slack in the belt.
Pull the belt tight – particularly important
when thick outer clothing is worn. It
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Safety
To fasten the belt
Press the red button to release the belt
The belt guide on door pillar
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
The front safety belts have their lower
anchorage points on the seats. The safety
belts follow the seats when the legroom is
adjusted.
Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as
possible without rubbing against the neck.
To avoid chafing in the case of a short
person, the guide can be lowered until the
belt comes about an inch (a few centime-
ters) from the throat but still provides safe
restraint.
Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to
thedesiredposition. Tolowerit,depressthe
catch release button while lowering the
guide. Check that the guide locks in its new
position.
Front safety belts
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as
possible.
Refer to page 251 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
Belt height adjustment,
Sport Sedan
The belt guide on the door pillar for the front
safety belts can be set at different heights.
The front belt guide in the Convertible is not
adjustable due to the belt being incorpo-
rated into the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
15
Sport Sedan: The front safety belts are
Safety belt pretensioners
WARNING
equipped with pretensioners and force limit-
ers. The pretensioners are activated in the
event of a violent frontal or side-on crash.
The safety belt pretensioners are only acti-
vated if the safety belt in question is in use
but not activated should the car roll over.
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other
components must be inspected by an
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as
necessary.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the forward movement of the body
by tensioning the belt. The force limiters
reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken-
ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the
body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi-
ble.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer for any necessary
repairs.
Convertible:Thefrontandrearsafetybelts
are equipped with pretensioners and force
limiters. The pretensioners are activated in
the event of a violent frontal or side-on
crash. The front safety belt pretensioners
are only activated if the safety belt in ques-
tion is in use.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a
safety belt to protect both themselves and
the unborn child.
The lap belt should be placed low, across
the hips and over the upper thighs.
The safety belt pretensioners serve to
reduce the movement of the body by ten-
sioning the belt, including in a roll over
crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads
on the body by "slackening" the safety belt
slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy
as gradually as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16
Safety
Safety belts, rear seat
Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see
page 69
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not
become trapped when the backrest is
folded down or raised (see page 140).
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
must be properly secured with the
safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
Rear safety belts
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
See page 251 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
• Make sure you use the correct safety
and left-hand rear seats are close
together.
Securing an item on the rear seat
The three rear seats all have three-point
safety belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across
youandinsertingthetongueintothebuckle.
Check that it is securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as
possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
17
We recommend that adjustments to the
driver’s seat be performed in the following
order:
Seats
WARNING
1 Height
2 Legroom
3 Backrest rake angle
4 Head restraint height
Never adjust the driver’s seat except
when the car is stationary.
Lastly, adjust the position of the steering
wheel (see page 122).
Manually adjusted front seats
(if equipped)
Electrically adjustable front seats
See page 19.
The following front seat adjustments can be
made to achieve a comfortable driving
position:
Electric heating, front seats (option)
See pages 107 and 116.
• Height
Sport Sedan - driver’s seat
Convertible - both seats
• Legroom
Sport Sedan - both seats
Convertible - both seats
• Backrest rake angle
Sport Sedan - both seats
Convertible - both seats
• Lumbar support firmness
Sport Sedan - driver’s seat
Convertible - only electrically adjustable
front seats
Height adjustment
Sport Sedan, driver’s seat
Convertible, both front seats
Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is
spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-
tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will
increase the height in steps.
Press down the lever to lower the seat.
Repeated downward presses of the lever
will lower the seat in steps.
• Head restraint height
Sport Sedan - both seats
Convertible - both seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18
Safety
Adjusting the legroom
Adjusting the backrest
Adjusting the lumbar support
Legroom adjustment
Lift the lever under the front of the seat and
slide the seat to the desired position.
Backrest rake angle
Lumbar support, Sport Sedan
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbarsupportby
turning the knob.
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
WARNING
Check that the seat is locked in the new
position. If not, it may move while the car
is being driven and it could result in injury
to the occupant in the event of a crash.
To find the most comfortable position, turn
the knob to provide stepless adjustment of
the backrest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
19
Electrically adjustable front
seats
(option)
WARNING
• The seats are actuated by powerful
motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-
ing the seat, and make sure that noth-
inggets caughtand damaged. Ensure
thatnothingcanbetrappedbehindthe
seat when adjusting it.
• Bear in mind that children can be
injured if they play with the electrically-
operated seats.
Adjusting the height and angle
Adjusting the legroom
• Always remove the remote control
when you leave the car to prevent
personal injury caused by the electri-
cally adjustable seats, for example,
due to children playing. Electrically
adjustable front seats with memory
function, see page 20.
Height adjustment and seat
angle
Adjust the height of the seat with the rear
section of the front lever.
Adjust the angle of the seat with the front
section of the front lever.
Legroom adjustment
Adjust the legroom with the front lever.
With the doors closed the seats can only be
adjusted when the ignition is ON.
However, there are two exceptions:
• Tofacilitategettingintothecar, bothseats
can be adjusted when either of the front
doors is open.
• The seats can be adjusted up to
2 minutes after both doors have been
closed (applicable only to cars without
window and sunroof pinch protection).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20
Safety
Adjusting the rake angle
Adjusting the lumbar support
Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan
Memory function buttons
Backrest rake angle
Lumbar support, driver’s seat
Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbar support by
turning the knob.
Memory function
(option)
WARNING
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and
backrest can provide optimum protection
in the event of emergency braking or a
crash, in particular a rear-end crash.
The legroom of the electrically operated
driver’s seat can always be adjusted,
whether or not a front door is open and
irrespective of the position of the ignition
switch.
Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with
the rear lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
21
When the ignition is ON, all seat settings
canbeadjusted. Whenthedoor is open and
beforetheremote controlhas beeninserted
into the ignition switch, all seat settings can
be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.
Head restraints
Sport Sedan
Head restraint, Convertible, see page 68.
The memory also includes the door mirror
settings.
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
Storing and restoring settings
1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The lumbar support is not included by
the memory function.
2 Press and hold the M-button and then
press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2
or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that
the settings have been saved.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
Therefore, the SAHR does not normally
need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-
end crash.
The front and rear head restraints can be
raised andloweredto anumber of positions.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
head restraintforward and upward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
To recall programmed settings, press and
hold the desired memory button until the
seat and door mirrors adopt their pro-
grammed positions. The memory function
also includes the door mirror settings.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side
door mirror can be angled down, refer to
page 134.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: Press the head restraint
forward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Safety
Child safety
WARNING
WARNING
• Never leave children unattended in a
Protect children from getting
trapped in the trunk of your car
WARNING
car, even for a short time.
• Children must always be suitably
restrained in the car.
– Children can suffer heat stroke,
perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and
hurt themselves or others.
• Teach children not to play in or around
cars.
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
• Watch children when loading or
unloading the car so they don´t get
locked in by mistake.
• At gas stations, take the remote
control out of the car while filling the
tank.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm) canbekilledby the
airbag
• Always lock the doors and trunk of
your car, and keep the keys out of chil-
dren´s sight and reach.
• Never allow children to climb on top of
or under motor vehicles.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• Keeptherearfold-downseatclosedto
help prevent children from getting into
the trunk from inside the car.
• Always look for children before back-
ing your car out of a garage or drive-
way.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,
never let a car idle in an enclosed
garage.
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
• Supervise young children around
buckets of water while washing your
car. Small children can drown in a
short time in less than an inch of water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
23
The LATCH system consists of top tether
andloweranchorages(alsocalledISOFIX).
In this vehicle, LATCH is installed at the two
outboard seating positions in the rear seat,
and there is a top tether on the rear center
position (not Convertible). The top tethers
are located on top of the parcel shelf
(Convertible: behind the head restraints),
see page 26. They are covered by a lid with
a child seat anchor symbol. The lower
anchorages are located where the seat
cushion and seat back come together.
There is a label above the inner lower
anchorage, see picture on next page. Label
consists of a symbol of a child restrained in
a seat inside a circle.
General information on child
safety
The same attention must be given to child
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Children travel most safely when properly
restrained. However, the type of restraint
must be appropriate for the size of the child.
Always consult your Saab dealer before
fitting a child seat, child restraint or booster
cushion.
Make sure you are acquainted with the
legal requirements for seating children
in the car.
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child restraint instructions.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
Saab recommends the use of a rear-
facing child seat for as long as this is
possible - at a minimum for all children
under the age of 3 (approx. 15 kg). Use a
child seat approved for the weight of the
child.
LATCH
LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers
for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan-
dard for a uniform method of fitting child
restraints without using the standard safety
belts. Only certain child restraints are
equipped to utilize the LATCH system.
The LATCH system is installed in the car to
facilitate proper fitting of child restraints
designed for and equipped with LATCH
attachments.
Whenfittingchildrestraintsincarsyoumust
always read the instructions supplied by the
child restraint manufacturer.
Ifyou haveany questions regardingLATCH
please contact your Saab dealer.
Saabrecommendstheuseofaboosterseat
for children up to the age of 10.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24
Safety
Lower anchorages (ISOFIX) in the rear seat, Sport Sedan
Lower anchorages (ISOFIX) in the rear seat, Convertible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
25
LATCH child seat installation
Before starting the installation, please read
through this instruction, and the child seat
installation instruction.
1 Place the child restraint on one of the
designated outboard rear seat cush-
ions.
2 Slide the attachment on the child
restraint in between the seat cushion
and backrest.
3 Press the child restraint down on the
seat, 1 in illustration.
4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining
up the inner restraint attachment arm
with the label, 2 in illustration.
Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top
tether
Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with
top tether
5 Connect the restraint attachment arms
to the anchorages 3 in illustration.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
6 Follow the child restraint instructions to
confirm that both restraint attachment
arms are properly attached to the bars.
7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car
anchorage and tighten according to the
restraint instructions, see page 26
and 27.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorage
bars and the top tether strap.
Only use the belt supplied with the child
restraint.
For the top tether, only use the strap sup-
plied with the child restraint.
The availability of LATCH child restraints is
limited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26
Safety
Child tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Sport Sedan
Convertible, see page 27
WARNING
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
The car is provided with three top tether
anchorages.Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3
in illustration.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
8 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
1 Open the cover that is right behind the
child restraint, 1 in illustration.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
described in the child restraint installa-
tion instruction.
4 Lower the headrest and route the tether
over it.
5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in
illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
27
Child tether anchorages for
forward facing child seats
Convertible
WARNING
Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints.
1 Raise the head restraint
2 Push the catch forward and pull the head
Top tether anchorages in the rear seat
Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult safety belts.
Child restraints with a tether strap must be
attached according to Canadian and U.S.
safety standards.
If you have any questions regarding child
anchorages please contact your Saab
dealer.
The car is provided with two top tether
anchorages. Usetheonethatisrightbehind
the seating position in which the child
restraint is to be installed and attach the
restraint as follows:
ages (ISOFIX) or the safety belts as
tion instruction.
WARNING
4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
If the size of the child restraint makes it
impossible to put the head restraint back
on, place it in the trunk.
5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the
child restraint is pressed hard against
the backrest.
6 Pull the child restraint to make a second
check that the restraint is securely
attached at both the lower anchorages
bars on the safety belts and the top
tether strap.
1 Remove the head restraint on the seat-
ing position where the child restraint
shall be fitted.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Secure the lower part of the child
restraint by means of the lower anchor-
7 Puttheheadrestraintbackonandmake
sure it is secure mounted. Adjust it in its
highest position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28
Safety
Iffittingachildrestraintthatisintendedtobe
secured in position by the standard safety
belt, make use of the locking function of the
belt.
Locking the belt lessens the risk that the
seat will work loose while the car is in
motion.
The safety belt locking function will be deac-
tivated when the safety belt is retracted.
Installation of child restraint
using the standard safety belt
1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the
buckle.
2 Disengage the safety belt from the child
restraint, according to the instructions
from the child restraint manufacturer.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s
instructions on the use of child restraint
systemscan cause yourchildto strike the
vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or
crash.
1 Position the child restraint in the back
seat.
2 Route the belt in the restraint according
to the installation instruction of the
restraint.
3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.
Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.
Clicking sound indicates that the lock
function is in work.
4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the
child restraint in position.
3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-
ing sound ceases.
Child restraints that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor-
dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
When fitting child restraints in cars you
must always read the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint manufacturer.
5 Check for correct locking function by
pulling on the belt. The belt must not
unreel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
29
There are two impact sensors on the front
bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very
soon after the moment of impact, these
register that the car is involved in a crash.
Using this information and data from the
central sensor in the control module, the
controlmoduledetermineswhetherornotto
inflate the airbags. The control module also
controls whether other components of the
airbag system are to be deployed: safety
beltpretensioners,inflatablecurtains(Sport
Sedan) and roll over bars (Convertible).
Which airbag system components are
deployed depends on a number of factors,
such as the force of the crash and the angle
of impact.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alenttoahigh-speedcrash(airbagsinflated
to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also
be activated (Sport Sedan) see page 35.
Airbag system components
Airbag
• Airbag in steering wheel
• Airbag in instrument panel in front of
passenger seat
• Side airbags in front seat backrests
Convertible: The side airbags help
protect the head also
• Inflatablecurtainsalonglengthofheadlin-
ing (from front to rear roof pillars)
(Sport Sedan only)
• Safety belt pretensioners for front seats
(all) and outer rear seats (Convertible
only).
The airbag system supplements the protec-
tion provided by the safety belts to further
enhance the safety of occupants taller than
55 in. (140 cm).
Whenthesystemisactivatedatthemoment
of impact, the airbag inflates and then
deflates through holes in the back. The
whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,
quicker than the blink of an eye.
The steering wheel and passenger airbags
are so-called smart airbags. The driver and
passenger airbag system compensates for
safety belt usage and the force of the crash
at the moment of impact.
WARNING
To reduce risk of death or serious injury:
• Always wear your safety belt.
• Always adjust your seat so that you
are as far back as possible but still
able to operate the pedals and reach
the steering wheel and controls
comfortably.
• Passengers 12 and under or shorter
than 55 inches (140 cm) must always
travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted
with a passenger airbag.
If a fault arises in the airbag system during
a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the
main instrument panel will come on and the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
• Never fit a child seat in front of the
passenger airbag.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30
Safety
Inflated airbag (driver’s side).
Inflation and deflation of airbag takes
approx. 0.1 s
Both front airbags inflated
The driver and passenger front airbags are
triggeredby violent front-endcrashes. They
are not activated by minor front-end
impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and
side-impacts.
Note:
Impact sensors react differently depending
on whether or not the front safety belts on
the driver’s and passenger sides are used.
Situations can therefore arise where only
oneoftheairbagsinflates. It isalsopossible
for only the safety belt pretensioners to be
activated and for the airbags to remain unin-
flated.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
If only Stage I is activated at the moment of
impact, Stage II will automatically be acti-
vatedlatertoneutralizethegas generatorin
the airbag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
31
Airbag system
Accessories and other equipment must
not be fitted to the surfaces marked as
these are where the airbags inflate in the
event of a crash.
1 Steering wheel with integral airbag
2 Passenger airbag
3 Side airbag
4 Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan only)
5 Sensors in front bumper
6 Sensor, side-impact protection
7 Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan only)
8 Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32
Safety
• Never attach anything to the steering
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in
injury if the airbag should inflate. The
same applies to anything you might
haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for
instance.
• If the airbag warning light
remains
WARNING
on after the car has been started or
comes on while you are driving, have
the car checked immediately by an
authorized Saab dealer. The warning
light could signify that the airbags may
not inflate in a crash, or they could
even inflate without a crash. See
page 81.
• Even if the car is equipped with
AIRBAGS, safety belts must still
always be worn by all occupants.
• Note that because an airbag inflates
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will
not provide protection against a
second impact occurring in the same
incident. Always use your safety belt.
• Some components of the airbag will
be warm for a short time. In some
circumstances the airbag can cause
minor burns or abrasions to the body
when the airbag inflates/deflates.
• Fumes are generated by the chemical
reaction that inflates the airbag.
Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-
tion should be washed with clean
water and a mild soap as soon as
possible.
In the event of eye irritation, flush the
eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat
least 20 minutes.
• Always sit with the whole of your back
incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,
and with your seat as far back as is
practical.Otherwise you will be thrown
back against the backrest when the
airbag inflates which could cause you
injury or death. The airbag needs
room in which to inflate.
• Never rest your hands or forearms on
the steering-wheel center padding.
In case of persistent irritation, consult
a doctor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
33
Operation of the steering wheel airbag in
a front-end crash
Front passenger seat
WARNING
WARNING
• DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY can occur
Moment of impact.
• Children 12 and under or
shorter than 55 inches
(140 cm)can be killedby the
airbag
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in
the right front seat of a car equipped with
apassengerairbag. Inflationoftheairbag
in the event of a crash could seriously
injure or kill a child.
Sensors detect a
deceleration and send
a signal via the control
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the
airbag.
• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace
for children
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in
the front
The system is the same as that used on the
driver’s side.
The airbag systems are interconnected and
• Sit as far back as possible from the
airbag
• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and
CHILD RESTRAINTS
have a common warning light
. The pas-
The inflating airbag
cushions the driver.
senger airbag module is housed in the
fascia above the glove box and is marked
"AIRBAG".
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal
crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
• Never allow a child to stand in front of
the seat or to sit on the lap of a front
seat passenger. Serious injury or
death could result if the airbag is
inflated in a crash.
Airbag now fully
inflated.
• The glove box must be closed while
travelling. An open glove box door
could cause leg injuries in the event of
a crash.
The car is equipped as standard with
a passenger airbag.
The airbag starts to
deflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34
Safety
The side airbags, which help protect the
upper body (head also in Convertible), are
integrated in the outside edges of the front
seat backrests. The side impact protection
of the Sport Sedan also includes inflatable
curtains (see page 35).
The side impact protection will be activated
if certain predetermined conditions are met
such as the force and angle of the impact,
the speed of the car on impact, and at which
point on the car´s side the impact occurs.
The side-impact protection is only activated
on the side of impact, while the safety belt
pretensioners on both sides are deployed.
The front seats and outer rear seats have
safety belt pretensioners.
There are two sensors on each side of the
car, one at the rear of each door sill and one
in the lower part of each C-pillar.
Side-impact protection
WARNING
• Neverplaceanything onthedashorin
frontoftheseatas, in additionto being
a hazard to passengers, this could
interferewiththe function of the airbag
in the event of a crash. The same
appliestothemountingofaccessories
on the dash.
• This car is equipped with side airbags
and no extra seat cover should be
fitted. Failure to observe this warning
could result in the side airbags not
inflating as intended and thus not
providing the intended protection
either.
• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet
up on the dash, on the seat or out of
the window.
• Do not carry anything in your lap.
Head protection
• Never placeany objectinthe areathat
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
The pillar trim and headlining (not Converti-
ble soft top) are designed to absorb energy,
softening possible blows to the head. After
acrash, theseitems must be changed in the
seat positions that were occupied. Never fit
accessories to the pillar trim or headlining
as these could reduce the effectiveness of
the head protection and inflatable curtain
(Sport Sedan).
• For optimum protection, sit upright in
theseat, withyoursafety beltcorrectly
fastened.
Convertible: The Convertible has two side
impactprotectionsensors,oneoneachside
of the car. These are located at the rear of
the sills.
• Theside-impactprotectionwillonly be
activated in the event of a side-on
crash and not in the event of a rear-
end crash or the car rolling over. For
the Convertible’s Roll-over protection
see page 70.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or
the seat seam, in the area of the side
airbag must be repaired immediately
by an authorized Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
35
Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan
WARNING
• Do not sit with your head resting
against the side window. The inflat-
able curtain is designed to inflate
between the window and the head.
Resting the head against the window
could prevent the inflatable curtain
from providing the intended
protection.
• Hang only light clothes from the hooks
ontherearseatcourtesyhandles.The
items of clothing must not contain
heavy or sharp objects. Do not use
wire coat hangers.
Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,
Sport Sedan
Inflated side airbag with head protection,
Convertible
• Do not position a sun visor or similar
item in the area that would be filled by
the inflatable curtain.
• To reduce the risk of head injuries in
the event of a crash, the roof pillars
andheadliningincorporatecushioning
material. Do not attach anything to the
car’s headlining, roof pillars or side
panels as this could prevent the side-
impact protection from providing the
intended protection.
• Do not stack loads so high that they
could encumber the inflatable curtain
in the event of a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36
Safety
The inflatable curtains, which protect the
head, are concealed along the lengths of
the headlining (all the way from front to rear
roof pillars).
The inflatable curtains inflate at the same
time as the side airbags in the front seats in
case of a side-on impact.
The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of
head injuries to the occupants of the car’s
outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys
into the window area between the front and
rear roof pillars.
If the airbag system registers forces equiv-
alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II
for the steering wheel and passenger
airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be
deployed.
Inflated inflatable curtain, sport Sedan
Prohibited seating position
For optimal protection, do not sit too close to
the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if
someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-
able curtain comes down from the headlin-
ing and covers a large portion of the side
windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
37
Airbag warning lamp
WARNING
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
WARNING
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the airbag module - the steering
wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passen-
ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows - will be hot
for a short time. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some
smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in
the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble. To
avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should
get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but can not get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing prob-
lemsfollowinganairbagdeployment, you
should seek medical attention.
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. See page 81.
• The airbags in your vehicle may not
inflate in a crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
Inmanycrashessevereenoughtoinflatean
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield break-
age may also occur from the right front pas-
senger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need
some new parts for your airbag system. If
you do not get them, the airbag system
will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts.
The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 266.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38
Safety
• Let only qualified technicians work on
your airbag system. Improper service can
mean that your airbag system will not
work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Servicing the airbag system
Scrapping or working on airbag
and belt pretensioners
The airbag system must be inspected as
part of the normal service program but oth-
erwise may be regarded as maintenance-
free.
WARNING
Notice: If you damage the covering for
thedriver'sortherightfrontpassenger's
airbag, or the side impact airbag cover-
ing on the ceiling near the side windows,
the bag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger's airbag, or side impact
airbag module and ceiling covering for
the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings.
• Under no circumstances should any
modifications be made that affect the
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry.
• During any welding, both battery
cables must be disconnected and
covered.
• Beforequick dryingpaintinthevicinity
of the electronic control module, the
module’s grounding points and wiring
must be covered.
• Airbags and safety belt pretensioners
must be deployed under controlled
conditions before the car is scrapped
oranyofthesystem’scomponentsare
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a
result of a crash must be replaced by
new ones.
• Airbag-system components must
neverbetransferredforuseinanother
vehicle.
• All work involving the scrapping or
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must be carried out by autho-
rized personnel only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety
39
In addition, airbags provide no protection
against a secondary impact occurring in the
same incident. So there is no doubt about
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult, before they
are thrown forward, in a serious frontal
crash.
How do I position the seat to leave room for
the airbag to inflate?
When do the airbags in the steering wheel
and passenger side of the dash board
inflate?
Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain
predetermined conditions in a moderate to
severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,
depending on such factors as the force and
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on
impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof
the impacting object.
The airbag canonly beactivatedonce in the
same incident.
Do not attempt to drive the car after an
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble.
Frequently asked questions on
function of the airbag
Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-
bags are fitted?
Yes, always! The airbag system compo-
nents merely supplement the car’s normal
safety system. Moreover, the front airbags
willonlybeactuatedinamoderatetosevere
frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,
of course, that they provide no protection in
minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side-
crashes or if the car rolls over.
The safety belts help to reduce the sideway
movement of the body in a crash.
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tancebetweenyouandtheairbag. Forshort
drivers, specialaccessorypedalextensions
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with
great force – to be fast enough to protect an
adult in the seat.
But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs
in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag
will make the optimum contact with the
occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. Ifthe
occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-
tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.
What won’t trigger the airbag?
The airbag will not be activated in all frontal
crashes. For instance, if the car has hit
somethingrelativelysoftandyielding(e.g. a
snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a
low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-
sarily be triggered.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40
Safety
How loud is the inflation?
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning
light comes on?
Are the dust and fumes given off when the
airbag operates at all harmful?
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,
but it is of an very short duration and will not
damage your hearing. For a short time after-
wards you could experience a buzzing
noise in your ears.
Most people who have experienced it
cannot remember the noise of the inflation
at all – all they remember is the noise of the
crash.
If thewarning light is on, it means that afault
has been detected in the system. The
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as
intended and it might even be activated
erroneously. You should therefore take the
cartoanauthorized Saabdealerassoonas
possible.
Most people who have remained in a car
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of
the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos-
sible getting dust on your skin as there is a
risk of skin irritation.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may
bringonanattack, in which case youshould
follow the normal procedure advised by
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a
doctor afterwards.
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a
passenger airbag is installed?
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under or shorter than
55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the air-
bag.
The back seat is the safest place for chil-
dren.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.
Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.
Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Security
A key code number is supplied with your
car. This number needs to be quoted for
ordering a new traditional key (contained in
the remote control). Therefore, keep this
number in a safe place.
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked. If the code is
incorrect, the car will not start.
Doors
Central locking
Open the door by lifting the door handle.
The following message appears on the
Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is
not closed (text displayed first when vehicle
speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the
door has still not been closed):
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Close doors.
The car is supplied with two remote con-
trols. It is possible to have up to five remote
controls programmed for the car at any one
time. If one is lost, a replacement should be
obtained as soon as possible. Contact your
Saab dealer. When a new key is pro-
grammed into the car, the lost key will be
deprogrammed automatically.
Remote control
The remote control and ignition key are inte-
grated in one unit, and referred to in this
manual as the remote control.
The remote control contains a mechanical
key, referred to in this manual as the tradi-
tional key. This traditional key can be used
in an emergency to lock or unlock the
driver’s door from outside (see page 44).
This key does not fit the ignition switch.
Note:
If a new remote control has to be ordered
and programmed, at least one old one is
required for the locking system’s electronic
unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote
control.
Once the new remote control has been pro-
grammed, the old unit that is lost will not
work. Therefore you should carry two
remote controls separately, especially on
long journeys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
43
Remote control functions
Button Pressed once
Pressed
twice
Hold and
NOTICE
press the
buttonmore
than 2 s
The remote control contains delicate
electronics.
Locks all doors
and trunk lid.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
Convertible: also
fuel filler door.
Unlocks driver´s The other
Comfort
opening, see
page 123.
• Do not place the remote control where
it may be subjected to high tempera-
tures, e.g. on the instrument panel.
door.
doors are
unlocked
Convertible: also
fuel filler door.
and the trunk
lid switch is
enabled.
• Warm the remote control in your
hands for a couple of minutes if it has
become very cold to prevent malfunc-
tion.
Unlocks and
slightly opens
trunk lid.
Remote control
1 Locks car
Checks number
of remote con-
trols, see
2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting
3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid.
4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.
Activates panic function
• For details on changing the battery,
refer to page 48.
page 47.
Turns on exterior
and cabin lighting
*) (for 30 s) or
turns off lighting
and deactivates
panic alarm.
Panic alarm
(activates
alarm manu-
ally), see
page 52.
*) parking lights, side direction indicators,
taillights and license plate lighting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44
Security
Remote unlocking
Locking/unlocking the car
Pressing the
button once: the driver´s
door is unlocked(Convertible: also fuel filler
door). Press a second time to unlock the
rest of the doors and enable the trunk lid
switch.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice to
confirm.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
If a fault arises in the locking system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
Never lock anyone in the car.
Remote locking and unlocking also control
the car alarm.
Lock system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door
with the traditional key
Remote locking
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Saab Information Display (SID), see
page 87.
Press the
button once: all doors and
the trunk lid locked (Convertible: also fuel
filler door).
The hazard warning lights will flash once to
confirm.
Intermittent malfunctioning
If remote unlocking should fail to work
Equipment in thevicinity of the car that uses
the same frequency as the remote control
may cause interference to the remote con-
trol signal. In this case, retry from another
angle and aim at the receiver located by the
steering wheel.
1 Remove the traditional key from the
remote control by pressing the emblem
on the reverse of the remote control.
(This key only fits the front left-hand
door.)
2 Carefully remove the cover plate from
the keyhole in the door.
3 Unlock the door with the key.
The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the
alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-
tion switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
45
Locking a car with dead battery
Trunk lid
Opening
Thetrunklidisunlockedandslightlyopened
when the button on the remote control
or on the inside of the driver’s door is
pressed once.
The steering wheel lock requires sufficient
battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the bat-
tery voltage drops below a certain level
while the remote control is in the ignition
switch, you will not be able to remove the
remote control.
The hazard warning lights will flash three
times to confirm.
If you must leave the car, proceed as
follows:
1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock
buttons on the doors.
2 Lock the front left door from outside with
the traditional key (see page 44). The
car is now locked but the car alarm will
remain inactive.
Closing
The trunk lid is locked when closed.
If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is
closeditisarmedandthemovementsensor
in the cabin will be armed.
Opening button on driver’s door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46
Security
the battery from running flat. Also, if the car
has electrically adjustable seats, these will
cease to operate.
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child
safety locks that are activated by means of
a catch next to the door latch.
Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key
(enclosed in the remote control) and turn it
45° in the direction shown on the label on
the door.
When the child safety lock is in the locked
position, the door can only be opened from
outside the car.
Central locking switch
Child safety locks
WARNING
Switches on front doors
The central locking can also be operated
from inside the car using the button by each
front door handle.
If small children are carried in the rear
seat, the safety locks on the rear doors
should be activated to prevent uninten-
tional opening from the inside.
• Locking the car with the remote control
renders these buttons inoperative.
• If you are sitting in the car and press the
button on the driver’s door, this will unlock
the driver’s door. Press the button a
second time to unlock the remaining
doors and the trunk lid. The button on the
passenger door works in the same way
except that this first unlocks the passen-
ger door. During this operation the rear
doors remain locked.
If the car is left withoneor more doors open,
the interior lighting will be switched off auto-
maticallyafter20 minutes.Thisistoprevent
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
47
Trunk Release Handle
Reprogramming lock system
functions
Certain lock system functions can be
reprogrammed at a Saab dealer (see
page 280).
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
Checking the number of remote
controls
Tocheckthenumberofremotecontrolsthat
are programmed for the car:
NOTICE
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it
1 Inserttheremotecontrolintotheignition
switch and turn it to ON.
2 Press and hold the
button for more
Trunk Release Handle
than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the ON position.
3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will
now display the number of remote
controls that are programmed for your
car, and which of these (1–5) is in the
ignition switch.
Example of SID message:
2: standard key
Key No: 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48
Security
Battery type: For optimum performance in
alltemperaturesandgoodservicelife,Saab
recommends the use of a Sony or Pana-
sonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.
Changing the key battery
WARNING
The battery should last for about 4 years of
normal use.
The battery type is marked on the inside of
the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-
prints on the faces of the battery.
Keep the battery and other small compo-
nents of theremote control out of reach of
children.
1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the
remote control to remove the traditional
key.
NOTICE
The electronics of the remote control are
sensitiveto electrostatic discharge. Incor-
rect handling when changing the battery
can damage the remote control. Avoid
touching electronic components of the
remote control with your hands.
Press the emblem to remove
the traditional key
2 Insertthetipof the key intothesmall slot
and turn the key to split the remote
control.
When the voltage of the remote control bat-
tery drops below a certain level, the Saab
Information Display (SID) will display:
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Change the battery as soon as possible to
avoid malfunctioning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
49
5 After changing the battery in the remote
control, it is only possible to use the
remotecontrolalimitednumber oftimes
before synchronization with the car is
lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons
ontheremotecontrolrepeatedlydirectly
after changing the battery.
Unlock the car and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch to
synchronize the remote control and car.
Immobilizer
The remote control contains an electronic
code that is unique to your car. When the
remote control is inserted into the ignition
switch, this code is checked and the LED on
the dashboard double-flashes for
3 seconds. Ifthecodeiscorrect, thecar can
be started.
Each time you remove the remote control
from the ignition, the electronic starting
interlock is activated, the LED double-
flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes
immobilized.Ifanincorrectremotecontrolis
now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.
the remote control of another car), the
immobilizer will remain operative (the LED
will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-
ble to start the car.
If the central locking system does not work
after changing the battery and the car is
locked, proceed as follows:
1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi-
tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this
will be tripped.
2 Open the door and insert the remote
control into the ignition switch. If the car
has a car alarm, this will be silenced.
The remote control and receiver unit are
now synchronized.
Change the battery and fit together
the two halves of the remote control
3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery
so that it is positioned in the same way
as the old battery, with the positive (+)
side facing down.
4 Fit the two halves of the remote control
together and press them together until
you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing
the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key
into the remote control.
If the immobilizer system malfunctions, the
Saab Information Display (SID) displays:
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50
Security
If, when inserted into the ignition switch,
there is a problem checking the electronic
code of the remote control, the following
message will appear on the SID:
Thealarmisarmed11 secondsafterthecar
has been locked by remote control.
During the delay period, the LED shines
constantly. It will then start to flash once
every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the
dashboard.
If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car
is locked with the remote control, the LED
will flash 3 times per second for
11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood
and trunk lid are closed.
Car alarm
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the
ignition key. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
Key not accepted.
Contact Saab dealer.
Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer
to have the problem checked and rectified.
Locking the trunk lid: If you unlock the
The car alarm is armed when the car is
locked with the remote control.
The car alarm will not be armed if you
lock the car with the traditional key (see
page 44).
trunk lid from outside the car with the
button on the remote control, you must lock
All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are
monitored by the alarm.
the car with the
alarm.
button to arm the car
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
51
Toavoidanyinconvenience,makesurethat
anyoneusingthecar is familiar withhow the
car alarm and the locking system work.
If the alarm has been tripped since the car
was last locked, the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID) will display:
Arming the car alarm
Thealarmisarmedwhenalldoors, thehood
and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the
car with the remote control.
What trips the alarm?
The alarm will be tripped if:
• a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
• somebody tries to hotwire the car
Signals when the alarm is tripped
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm
signals will be set off:
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
• all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.
• the horn sounds for 30-second intervals
with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).
If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the
Saab Information Display (SID) will display:
The signals can vary between markets
and due to legal and insurance require-
ments.
Theft protection failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52
Security
Switching off the alarm if tripped
Panic function
The car alarm includes a panic function.
This function allows the alarm to be started
manually, for example, to attract attention.
The panic alarm can only be activated while
the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if
the car is driven off.
NOTICE
If the alarm has been triggered (direction
indicatorsflashingandhornsounding)itcan
be turned off by pressing one of the buttons
on the remote control or, if you are sitting in
the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see
below).
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same
timeunlockthecar, if thebuttononthe
key is pressed by mistake when the
car is still within its range.
When the alarm is tripped, the lights and
horn come on for 3 minutes or until you
press one of the remote control buttons.
To start the alarm manually proceed as
follows:
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks car.
• When locking the car by remote
control in extremely cold weather, it is
advisable to check that the lock
system has operated properly. To do
so, check that the interior locking
buttons are all down.
Turns off lights and horn.
Car remains locked.
Turns off lights and horn.
Unlocks trunk.
• Press and hold the
button on the
If not, unlock and relock the car again.
remote control for more than 2 seconds,
or if you are sitting in the car...
Turns off lights and horn.
Turns on exterior and cabin light-
ing. Car remains locked.
• Press and hold the
or
button on
If sitting in the car: Turn the remote
control to ON in the ignition switch
one of the front doors for more than
2 seconds.
To switch off the alarm:
• Press one of the remote control buttons
or, if you are sitting in the car, the
buttons on one of the front doors.
or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security
53
Overview of functions
Locking/arming Direction indicators flash once.
Unlocking/
disarming
Direction indicators flash twice.
Unlocking/
disarming trunk
lid
Direction indicators flash three times.
Alarm triggered Direction indicators flash for 5 min.
The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with
10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you
press one of the remote control buttons or turn
the remote control ON in the ignition switch.
Remote control Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).
In favorable conditions the range can be signifi-
cantly greater.
Remote control Normal life: approx. 4 years.
battery
Change the battery when the SID displays:
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
See Changing the key battery, page 48.
Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.
Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to
page 280.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Security
Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display
(SID) messages
SID message
Reason/action
Activity
LED signal
Key not accepted.
Error when remote control
inserted into ignition switch.
Arming (delay period)
Alarm armed
Disarming
Illuminates for 11 s.
Flashes once every 3 s.
Extinguishes.
Off.
Contact Saab dealer.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Battery needs replacing.
See page 48.
Alarm not armed
2: standard key
Key No: 1
Check of the number of remote
controls programmed for your
car. See page 47.
A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes
open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.
period.
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
The alarm has been tripped
since the car was last locked.
Car immobilized but not locked. Off.
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Error when immobilizer code
checked.
Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.
system, valid remote control
inserted or removed from ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
55
9-3 Convertible
Advice on soft top
operation ___________
Rollover Pop-up Bars ___
70
71
72
56
57
Electric windows_______
Interior lighting ________
Operating the soft top__
Raising the soft top
manually ___________
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually ____________
62
73
74
74
SID warnings and
messages __________
Manually opening the
fuel filler door ________
65
67
68
"Easy entry"__________
Head restraints _______
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk __________
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible _________
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56
9-3 Convertible
• Roof racks and ski holders must not be
mounted on the soft top.
• Onnoaccountshouldanythingbeputinto
the stowage space of the soft top (under
the soft top cover) since this could cause
an obstruction when the soft top is being
folded away.
• Do not place any objects on the covers
over the roll bars as this can hamper their
function.
• When operating the soft top, raise or fold
it fully until notified that operation is com-
plete by the SID. Do not leave the soft top
partially open/closed. If the soft top is left
in an intermediate position it will collapse
progressively after 20 seconds to prevent
overloading the drive system.
Advice on soft top
operation
• Once you have raised the soft top and
before driving off, always check that the
softtopis properly engagedwith thewind-
shield rail.
• Once you have folded the soft top and
before driving off, check that the soft top
cover is locked.
• Do not operate the soft top in tempera-
tures below 23°F (–5°C).
• Note that certain automatic car washes
can damage the soft top. This applies to
car washes that use mechanical feelers
bearing against the body. Saab advises
against washing the Convertible in an
automatic car wash.
WARNING
• Never touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top nor the upper rail of the
windshield while operating the soft
top.
• Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
• Washing the soft top, see page 252.
• Afterrainorwashingthecar,allowthesoft
top to dry completely before folding it.
Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause
water damage in the car and mildew to
form on the soft top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
57
Read the "Advice on soft top operation"
sectiononpage 56beforeoperatingthesoft
top.
Operating the soft top
The soft top is operated with the switch on
the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the
desired position until the soft top is fully
folded or raised.
The completion of folding or raising the soft
top is indicated by a chime.
WARNING
• Donot touch thehinges or struts of the
soft top during opening due to the
pinch hazard.
• Keep children out of reach.
Error messages that can appear on the SID
are shown on page 65.
• Do not operate the soft top while there
are bystanders close to the car.
• Make sure that the soft top cover has
locked properly after folding the soft
top.
Switch for operating the soft top
a Raising
b Folding
• Check that the soft top engages prop-
erly with the upper edge of the wind-
shield after raising.
NOTICE
If you drive off while raising or folding the
soft top, operation is halted when
the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h). This speed can be
programmed (0–20 mph/0–30 km/h) at a
Saab dealer. The movement of the car
and force of the wind can seriously
damage the components of the soft top
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58
9-3 Convertible
Remote opening (option)
You can fold the soft top when outside the
Opening
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
the soft top to be folded:
car by pressing and holding the
(unlock) button on the remote control. See
also page 123.
• Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph
(30 km/h).
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• Outside temperature must exceed 23°F
(–5°C).
• The trunk lid must be locked.
• There must be sufficient space in the
trunk for the soft top.
Folding
1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
thesoft top is fullyfoldedand the soft top
cover raised. Completed folding is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 65.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while folding the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
If you continue to hold the button after the
chime, all the windows will open after a brief
delay.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
59
1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in
luggage compartment lowered.
3 Soft top folded.
4 The soft top cover is closed.
2 The soft top cover is opened.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60
9-3 Convertible
securely to the upper edge of the wind-
shield.
If you hold the button pressed up after the
chime, all the windows will be closed after a
short delay.
Raising
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
raising the soft top:
• Vehicle speed must not exceed
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.
• The trunk lid must be locked.
Raising
1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance
for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft
(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).
2 Press and hold the soft top button until
thesoft topis fully raised andthesofttop
cover closed. Completed raising is indi-
cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-
tion a text message will be shown on the
SID. Refer to page 65.
Do not press any of the buttons on the
same section of the instrument panel as
the soft top switch while raising the soft
top. This will cause the soft top to stop
and then sink after about 20 seconds.
All side windows are opened slightly to pro-
tect the seals when the soft top is raised.
Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
61
1 The soft top cover is opened.
2 The soft top is raised.
3 The soft top cover is closed.
4 The rear window is lowered.
a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)
b 2" (5 cm
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62
9-3 Convertible
Raising the soft top
manually
WARNING
Only raise the soft top manually in an
emergency (e.g. due to an electrical
fault).
Do not touch the soft top button on the
instrumentpanelwhileclosingthesofttop
manually. This could cause personal
injury and damage the soft top mecha-
nism.
Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover
Do not fold the soft top having closed it
manually. This can damage the soft top
mechanism.
1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and
screwdriver located under the luggage
compartment floor.
2 Remove the two covers from the side
trim in the trunk, one from either side.
If there are two of you, it is easiest if you
stand on either side of the car and perform
steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.
3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing
forward thetwowire catches, one on the
left and one on right-hand side.
If the soft top has been folded mechanically
there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it
is possible to raise it manually (the pressure
must be released from the hydraulic sys-
tem).
If the car is without electrical power, the
trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to
page 73.
Tools under luggage compartment floor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
63
Soft top cover opened
Manual closing started
Soft top pulled towards windshield
7 Before raising the soft top, the two
4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it
will obstruct the soft top cover.
5 Open the soft top cover, upward and
backward.
catches in the leading edge of the soft
top must be opened. Stand in the rear
seatandpryoffthecoverwiththescrew-
driver. Using the tool, turn clockwise to
open the catches.
Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft
top. Pull it towards the windshield. This
operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of verti-
cal clearance.
WARNING
• Do not touch the hinges and struts of
the soft top during raising.
6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.
• Keep your hands clear of the front
windshield rail.
• Pinch hazard may cause personal
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64
9-3 Convertible
Soft top locked to windshield rail
Closing the soft top cover
Rear window locked to soft top cover
8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the
softtoptothewindshieldrail.Usethelug
wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly
1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that
thesoft top is properly locked in place by
pressing up the front edge. The soft top
must not move upward.
9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it
there. Close the soft top cover. It is not
possible to lock the soft top cover after
manual raising.
11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top
cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the
tool (the same tool as used to lock the
soft top to the windshield rail) into the
hexagonal hole in the soft top mecha-
nism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counter-
clockwise on the right had side of the
soft top and clockwise on the left-hand
side. Look at the soft top cover when
locking the rear window. The rear
window must make a tight seal against
the soft top cover.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging the paintwork on the
soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care
when closing the soft top cover.
10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top
as far as possible towards the soft top
cover.
The soft top system must be checked and
rectified without delay at a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
65
SID warnings and messages
The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:
Cause
Suitable action
Soft top front not locked.
Try again.
Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to
the windshield.
• Move the car so that it is standing level if on
a steep slope.
• Press the soft top button to fold the soft top
slightly. Fold the soft top again.
Soft top power pack
overheated.
This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to
continuously for more than 3 minutes.
cool down.
Allow to cool.
Open trunk.
Move the object hindering soft top operation.
Move goods away from
top storage area.
Soft top may be
damaged if operated
at low temperature.
Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures
below 23°F (–5°C).
Only manual
operation possible.
Contact Saab dealer.
Soft top cover not locked.
Try again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66
9-3 Convertible
Battery low.
The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow
soft top operation.
Soft top obstructed.
Clear obstacles and
try again.
Open/close soft top
completely to open trunk.
Complete soft top operation.
Open/close soft top
Complete soft top operation.
Close the trunk lid.
completely before driving
Close trunk.
Driver seat unlocked.
The backrest is not locked.
The backrest is not locked.
Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 67.
Passenger front seat
unlocked.
Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see
page 67.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
67
"Easy entry"
WARNING
• Always check that the backrest locks
properly when returned to normal
position.
• Check that the fore-and-aft position of
the seat is properly locked. The back-
rest and the entire belt-in seat must be
locked in position; otherwise the occu-
pant of the seat is at risk of injury
during braking or in the event of a
crash, especially if a rear-facing child
seat is fitted behind the backrest.
"Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat (option)
To facilitate getting in and out of the rear
seat, the front seats can be slid forward.
Manually adjusted passenger seats
Electrically adjustable front seats
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
1 Raise the handle by the head restraint
on the seat.
2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat
forward.
Repositioning:
2 Tip the backrest forward.
3 The seat now moves to its foremost
position.
Repositioning:
1 Tip back the backrest.
2 Slide the seat back to the desired
position.
1 Tip the backrest back to its normal
position.
Make sure the backrest and seat are prop-
erly locked in position.
2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat
has returned to its previous position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68
9-3 Convertible
Head restraints
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
head is optimally supported and the
center of the head restraint is at ear
height, thus reducing the likelihood of
neck injury in a crash.
• Raise the head restraints in the seats
that are occupied.
The front seats are equipped with Saab
ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare
designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if
the car is hit from behind.
Front head restraint
Rear head restraint
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
The front and rear head restraints can be
raisedand lowered toa numberofpositions.
In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is
forced back against the backrest. This, in
turn, causes the mechanism to press the
headrestraint forwardandupward, thus lim-
iting the backward movement of the head.
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both
sides and pull it straight up.
• Lowering: Press the head restraint for-
ward and downward.
The rear head restraints can be fully low-
ered to improve rearward vision when the
rear seats are unoccupied.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
69
Safety belts, rear seat,
Convertible
The two rear seats have three-point safety
belts with inertia reels.
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is
securely fastened.
Position the lap part low across the hips.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to
tighten the lap belt part.
The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as
possible.
Press the red button on the belt buckle to
release the belt.
Refer to page 251 for how to check the func-
tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it
safety belt. This reducestherisk ofthe
cargo being thrown about during hard
braking or a crash, which could cause
personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or
lying against sharp edges.
• Make sure you use the correct seat-
belt buckle.
For how to secure loads on the rear seat,
refer to page 16.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70
9-3 Convertible
Rollover Pop-up Bars
• Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with
great force, and you could be injured if
your arm or other body part, or if an
object is covering the bars when they
deploy. Don't put anything on the
cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.
The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars
must be kept clear.
The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are
located behind each rear seat head
restraint, along with the windshield frame
and the seatbelt pretensions, are designed
to deploy in the event of a crash or rollover.
WARNING
• The Rollover Pop Up Bars are
designed to deploy only once. If they
deploy, take your vehicle to your Saab
dealer immediately to have the Rollo-
ver Pop Up Bars repaired so that they
operate properly in the event of a
crash or rollover.
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt - even if you have airbags and Roll-
over Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety
belt during a crash helps reduce your
chance of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it.
Rollover Pop-up Bars
• The Rollover Pop Up Bars have pow-
erful springs that rapidly extend the
bars in rollover crashes, as well as in
moderate to severe crashes in which
the airbags deploy. Rollover Pop Up
Bars are supplemental to the safety
belts. They are designed to work with
safety belts but do not replace them.
NOTICE
To avoid therisk of damage tothe soft top
do not operated the soft top while the
bars are extended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
71
To close
Soft top raised – The windows are operated
individually.
Electric windows
WARNING
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window closes both side windows.
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
Automatic closing of a front side
window: Raise the button all the way and
release it. The rear side window must be
fully closed. Pinch protection (option) is
available for the front side windows.
For further information on the electric win-
dows, refer to page 123.
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car to prevent personal
injury caused by the activation of the
electric windows, for example, due to
children playing.
Deactivating the passenger door
window button
Window switches
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
With the
button on the driver’s door,
you can deactivate the window button on
the passenger door.
To open
Soft top raised – The windows open individ-
ually.
Soft top folded – The button for the front
window opens both side windows.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
the way down and release it. If the soft top
is folded, the rear side window is also low-
ered.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to amber (deactivated).
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
9-3 Convertible
Calibrating front electric
windows with pinch protection
(option)
The window liftsshould becalibratedif auto-
matic closing does not work or if the battery
has been disconnected. The pinch protec-
tion will not work if the windows are not
calibrated.
Interior lighting
The interior lighting consists of a front roof
light, two front reading lights, footwell light-
ing and courtesy lighting in the doors. The
light switches are located in the roof con-
sole.
The cabin lighting comes on:
• When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
• When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
Perform calibration as follows:
1 Make sure the soft top is raised.
2 Make sure the doors are closed.
3 Let the engine idle.
4 Press and hold the soft top button up
until a chime sounds.
The lighting goes out:
Front interior lighting - Convertible
1 Left-hand reading light
2 Cabin light
• When the car is locked.
During calibration, the four windows will
be raised and lowered several times.
Ifcalibrationfailstwiceinarow,havethecar
checked and rectified at a Saab dealer.
• When the ignition is turned on.
• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,
the interior lighting goes out automatically
after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.
3 Right-hand reading light
The interior lighting can be switched off
completely.
1 Open the driver’s door.
2 Turnoff the cabin lighting with the center
button, see illustration.
This is canceled when the ignition switch is
turned to position ON or when the car is
locked with the remote control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
73
Glove box
The glove box lighting comes on when the
compartment is opened and goes out when
it is closed.
Unlocking the trunk lid
manually
If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central
locking system, it can be unlocked
manually.
For changing bulbs, refer to page 223.
Sun visor
1 Takethetraditionalkeyoutoftheremote
control by pressing the emblem on the
reverse (see page 48).
2 Carefully prise off the round cover using
your nails, a credit card or similar so as
not to damage the paintwork.
3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional
key.
Contact a Saab dealer to have the central
locking system checked.
An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on
the inside of the sun visors. The lighting
comesonwhenthecoverisraisedandgoes
out when it is closed.
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting comes on and goes out
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 min to
prevent the battery from running flat.
Unlocking the trunk lid manually
For changing bulbs, refer to page 225.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74
9-3 Convertible
Manually opening the
fuel filler door
Convertible
If the fuel filler door, which is controlled by
the central locking system, does not unlock,
proceed as described below.
Check fuse 7 in the fuse panel at the end of
the fascia (see page 229). If this fuse has
blown or the new fuse blows, the fuel filler
door can be opened as follows:
Placing two golf bags
in the trunk
There is sufficient space in the trunk of the
Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as
follows.
1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the
first bag to the right.
2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it
lies on its widest side and slide it for-
ward, in under the soft top storage (see
illustration).
3 Put in the second bag in the same way
as the first, but lie it on its narrow side
(see illustration).
1 Open the two cut-out openings in the
side trim on the right-hand side of the
luggage compartment.
2 Loosen the two screws (do not unscrew
them fully). Lift up the screws and press
them out of their key hole slots.
Manually opening the fuel filler door, Con-
vertible
Contact a Saab dealer to have the central
locking system checked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-3 Convertible
75
Spoiler on trunklid
WARNING
Some models have a spoiler on the trunk-
lid. Avoid getting fingers and hands
trapped between the spoiler and rear
fender when closing the trunklid.
Wind deflector
A wind deflector is available as an acces-
sory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied
with the wind deflector carefully.
Position of first golf bag
Position of second golf bag
CargoWing
(accessory)
NOTICE
If play arises in any part of the
CargoWing, contact a Saab workshop
immediately to have this corrected. If
such play is not eliminated, the
CargoWing may come loose while driv-
ing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76
9-3 Convertible
(This page has been left blank)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
77
Instruments and controls
Warning and indicator
lights _______________
78
82
Instruments ___________
Information display,
main instrument panel_
85
Saab Information Display
(SID)________________
87
96
Switches _____________
Wipers and washers ____ 100
Manual climate-control
system______________ 103
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)__ 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Instruments and controls
Main instrument panel (Arc panel shown)
Warning and indicator
lights
The following warning and indicator lights
are found on the main instrument panel.
Antilock braking warning
This warning light illuminates when a fault
arises in the antilock brake system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
U.S. shown, Canada similar
Main instrument panel
The brake system will continue to function
but without ABS modulation.
1 Tachometer
2 Speedometer
3 Turbo gauge
4 Fuel gauge
5 Engine temperature gauge
6 Information display
7 Trip meter reset button
Charge warning light
This light comes on when the battery is not
being charged by the alternator. If the light
comes on during driving, stop as soon as
possible and switch off the engine.
Check the drive belt, see page 210.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
79
This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel
or ignition system. The car may still be
driven with care but the performance of the
engine will be somewhat diminished (see
page 150).
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Warning, oil pressure
(engine oil)
Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)
This light will come on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low. If thewarning light flashes or
comes on while you are driving, stop imme-
diately in a safe place, switch off the engine
and check the oil level (see page 202).
WARNING
An illuminated “Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates an engine-related problem. While
your car may be able to be driven with the
“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”
indicator light illuminated (limp-home
mode), you are advised to have your car
serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
NOTICE
Never drive the car when the oil pressure
warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can
cause serious engine damage.
NOTICE
The car should be checked immediately
at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious
faults from arising.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Continued driving without this problem
being corrected might cause serious
further damage to your car and create
unsafe driving conditions. The operator
should be prepared to take action if such
unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake
smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-
ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Turn off engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80
Instruments and controls
For safety reasons, stop the car and check
the level of the brake fluid (see page 206).
If the level is normal, depress the brake
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check
thelevelagain. Ifthelevelis stillnormal, you
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest Saab dealer to have the
brake system checked.
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-
utes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s load.
High beam Indicator
Brake warning light
This light shows when the high beam is on
(see page 97).
This light should come on briefly when you
turntheignitionkey toON. Ifitdoesn´tcome
on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem. This light indicates
when the brake fluid level is too low (see
page 206).
Front fog lights (option)
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
This light indicates when the front fog lights
are on (see page 98).
The front fog lights are switched off auto-
matically when the engine is switched off.
When the fog lights are next needed, they
will have to be switched on manually.
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
If a fault arises in the EBD function, the
,
and lights willcomeon. Also, thefol-
lowing message will appear on the Saab
Information Display (SID):
WARNING
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
• Never drive the car if these two lights
are on at the same time. Danger of
brake failure!
Ifthis isthecase, drivecarefully andcontact
a Saab dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
Brake warning light on page 80, Antilock
braking warning on page 78 and TCS OFF
or ESP OFF indicator on page 86.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir isbelow theMINmark, thevehicle
should be transported on a recovery
vehicle.
• Have the brake system checked
immediately at a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
81
Safetybelt reminder
Airbag warning light
Indicator, fuel
This light reminds the driver to buckle up.
This light comes on if a potentially serious
fault has occurred in the airbag system.
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
This light comes on when there is less than
about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the
tank.
Parking brake warning
light
NOTICE
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
This light comes on when the parking brake
is applied (see page 173).
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the airbag system may not be working
properly. One or more of the following
conditions may occur:
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the
event of a crash.
• Always apply the parking brake when
parking, see page 173.
• Always apply the parking brake
before removing the remote control.
• Do not apply the parking brake while
the car is moving.
- Deployment of the airbags without a
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in crashes
less severe than intended.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on for about four sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to
the Start or Drive position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82
Instruments and controls
Headlight and parking
light indicator
This light indicates that the headlights or
parking lights are on.
Cruise control indicator
light
This light comes on when the system is
engaged.
Autochecking of lights, main
instrument panel
Instruments
The warning and indicator lights shown
above should come on when the ignition
switch is turned to ON. They should go out
after about 4 seconds once the engine has
started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis
of each system or function.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
A protective function (interruption of the fuel
supply) limits the engine speed within the
red zone.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
83
Reset button
The reset button is positioned immediately
to the left of the speedometer.
• Ignition ON:
Press once – resets the trip meter.
• Ignition OFF:
Cars with manual transmission
Press once – enables you to read the
odometer and trip meter.
Press twice – resets the trip meter.
Cars with automatic transmission
Speedometer
(U.S. speedometer shown)
Odometer and trip meter
The speedometer displays the speed of the
car in miles per hour (mph). It receives infor-
mation about vehicle speed from the ABS’s
wheel sensors.
The odometer records the distance trav-
elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-
dian vehicles the distance indicated is in
kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and
tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres
on Canadian vehicles).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84
Instruments and controls
NOTICE
If the needle, despite the above action,
enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-
able place and allow the engine to idle. If
theneedlecontinuestorise, switchoffthe
engine.
Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,
stop thecaras soonas it issafe to do soand
check the coolant level (see page 205).
WARNING
Temperature gauge
Turbo gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume
used for combustion, which is equivalent to
the engine load.
Atlowloadsandwhentheengineisusedfor
braking, the needle will move within the
white zone.
Under certain barometric conditions the
needle may enter the first part of the red
zone without necessarily indicating that a
fault has arisen.
Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank
completely when the engine is hot, open
with care. The pressure in the cooling-
system can cause hot coolant and steam
to be released. Failure to heed this warn-
ing may result in personal injury.
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be
in the middle of the scale when the engine
is at normal operating temperature.
If the needle goes into the red zone (which
can occur at high outside air temperatures
or under heavy engine loads), choose the
highest possible gear ratio and the lowest
possible engine speed, and avoid shifting
down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
85
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone
and the engine at the same time loses
power, because the monitoring system is
limiting the boost pressure, you should
contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
Information display,
main instrument panel
Under the speedometer is a display. The
information shown here varies depending
on whether the car has a manual transmis-
sion or automatic transmission.
When the speed of the car exceeds
143 mph (230 km/h), acceleration is limited
by reducing the boost pressure. The pres-
sure gauge then moves towards the middle
of the white field, indicating a drop in engine
power and consequently the car’s speed.
Cars with manual transmission:
Fuel gauge
When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)
of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on
the main instrument panel comes on.
• The odometer reading is shown on the
left-hand side of the display.
• Various information and faults are
displayed in the center of the display.
• The trip meter reading is shown on the
right-hand side of the display.
Refueling, see page 153.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86
Instruments and controls
Cars with automatic
transmission:
TCS or
ESP indicator
TCS OFF or
ESP OFF indicator
This symbol lights up when the system is
operative.
Operation of the TCS or ESP indicates
reduced cohesionbetweenthetiresandthe
road, andthat extra care should be taken by
the driver.
WARNING
The system improves ride comfort and
safety during normal driving. It must
however not be regarded as a system
to enable the driver to maintain higher
speeds. The same precautions as
normal for safe cornering and driving
pages 169/ 171).
• Theodometerandtripmeterreadingsare
shown on the left-hand side of the display.
• Various information and faults are
displayed in the center of the display.
• The selected gear position is shown on
the right-hand side of the display.
TCS - standard equipment.
ESP - certain variants only.
Information symbol.
Read information on SID
This symbol lights up when the system is
disengaged using the ESP button.
This symbol comes on when a message or
warning is displayed on the Saab Informa-
tion Display (SID).
If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot
be turned off by pressing the ESP button.
Gear selector indicator
(cars with automatic trans-
mission)
Thecurrentgearpositionisdisplayedonthe
right-hand side of the information display.
When gears are selected manually, the
letter M (manual) and the selected gear are
displayed (see page 164).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
87
The following message is shown on the
Saab Information Display (SID):
Saab Information
Display (SID)
Various types of information are shown on
the SID: warnings, indications, trip com-
puter information and information from the
car’s Infotainment System.
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
or
The warnings and indications that can be
shown on the SID are listed on page 281.
When the engine is switched off, the current
If there is more than one message on the
of the first message. Each message will be
displayed for 10 seconds.
a SID message. If you acknowledge a mes-
sage but do nothing about it, the message
will be displayed again the next time you
start the car.
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
If so, have the system checked at a Saab
dealer.
See also Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 169 and Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) on page 171.
SID, control unit and display
Profiler
Adjustments can be made with the control
unit situated between the main instrument
panel and the audio system. This is called
Profiler.
car’s systems, such as the clock, alarm and
climatecontrolsystem. Theseareknownas
Profiler.
1 Activate Profiler by pressing the
CUSTOMIZE button.
2 Turn the INFO dial until the appropriate
system is selected.
3 Confirm selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Select Exitonce youhavemadethedesired
settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88
Instruments and controls
The number of systems that are displayed
on the SID depends on the car’s equipment
level. The list shown below includes the
systems that can be found in your car.
Trip computer function of the SID
WARNING
Climate System, page 117.
Rear Defroster
Heated Seats
Park Assistance, page 178.
SPA on
It is strongly recommended that the SID
settings be changed only when the car is
stationary. The driver’s attention can
otherwise easily be distracted from the
road.
Fan Settings
Air Distribution
A/C Mode
SPA off
Clock / Alarm, page 92.
Set Clock
Dual/Single Zone
Default Settings
System Settings, page 94.
Language
SID contains the following functions:
Set Alarm 08:30
Rain Sensor, page 101.
High
Temp
D.T.E.
Outdoor temperature
Estimated range (distance to
empty fuel tank)
Unit
Medium
Average fuel consumption
since function last reset
Speed Scale Illum.
Service Info
Fuel Ø
Date
Low
Date
Distance to destinations.
Function can also be used as
a trip meter
Dist
Arriv
Estimated time of arrival
Average speed since func-
tion last reset
Speed Ø
Speed W Speed warning (chime)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
89
Whentheengineisstarted, thefunctionthat
was selected when the engine was
switched off is displayed, with the following
exceptions:
Setting values
Resetting a single function
1 Select one of the functions using the
INFO dial.
• Speed W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h)
1 Selectthefunctionyouwishtoresetwith
the INFO dial.
• Fuel Ø
• Temp is displayed if the outside tempera-
ture is between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C).
• D.T.E is displayed if less than or equal to
30 miles (50 km).
• Dist(presetto100miles(100 km)ifnot
• Speed Ø
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
approx. 1 second.
The selected function will now be reset.
previously set)
• Speed Ø
• Arriv
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
Outdoor temperature
Resetting the trip computer
3 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
(Press CLEAR to reset the value.)
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
1 Select one of the functions using the
INFO dial.
• Fuel Ø
• Speed Ø
• D.T.E.
WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),
especially on bridges and stretches of
road that are sheltered from the sun.
Using DIST as a trip meter
1 Select Dist using the INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button for
approx. 1 second.
An arrow will now appear on the right-hand
side of the display, indicating that the trip
meter is running.
• Arriv
• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)
The Temp function is always activated
(eveninNIGHTPANELmode)iftheoutdoor
temperaturerisesor falls to between 26 and
38°F (–3 and +3°C).
2 Press and hold the CLEAR button
(approx. 3 seconds) until audible confir-
mation is given.
Ifthetemperaturesensor, locatedunderthe
front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,
temperature readings will be unreliable.
For how to set the year, month and day,
refer to Clock on page 92.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90
Instruments and controls
Speed warning
Calculating the arrival time
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive?)
This function shouldbeusedbeforestarting
out a journey.
To calculate the arrival time, the distance
must first be given.
Calculating the arrival time if a specified
average speed is maintained
(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to
drive and know what my average speed will
be?)
Thisfunctionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
First, set the distance under Dist.
This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).
The value can be set to between 0 and
150 mph (0 and 250 km/h).
1 Select Speed W using the INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Adjust the speed using the INFO dial.
4 Confirm the setting by pressing the
INFO dial.
A star on the right-hand side of the display
indicates when the speed warning function
is active.
An audible alarm will sound if the set speed
is exceeded.
Disengage the function with the CLEAR
button. Re-engage the function using
the INFO dial.
1 Select the Dist function using the
INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Set the distance to the destination using
the INFO dial.
1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
Speed Ø function.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
average speed.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
Select Arriv during the journey to display
thearrivaltimebasedonthe averagespeed
since Dist was set. If you take a break, this
time will be added to the previously calcu-
lated arrival time.
The time of arrival is updated during the
journey based on the average speed since
Dist was set. The speed of the car must
exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).
Similarly, you can check the distance left by
selecting Dist.
By selecting Dist during the journey, you
can see how much distance is left to travel.
After the distance to destination has
When Dist reaches zero it acts as a trip
meter.Thetipmeterstartsfromthedistance
that was set previously.
decreasedtozero,Distwill function as atrip
meter (see Using DIST as a trip meter). The
starting value for the trip meter will be the
last distance set for the Dist function.
Example: The Dist function is set to
100 miles. After the count-down has
reached 0 miles, Dist will act as a trip meter
beginning at 100 miles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
91
Calculating the requisite average speed
(What average speed do I need to maintain
to get to my destination in time?)
This functionshould be used beforestarting
out a journey.
To calculate the requisite average speed,
the distance must first be given.
Setting the date
NIGHTPANEL
To improve night-driving conditions inside
the car, the Night Panel mode can be
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the
most important instruments and displays
will be illuminated.
When the NIGHTPANEL button is pressed,
only the speedometer will be illuminated.
All other instrument lighting will be switched
off and the needles drop to zero.
1 Select the Date function using the
INFO dial.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the year.
4 Press the INFO dial.
5 Turn the INFO dial to set the month.
6 Press the INFO dial.
7 Turn the INFO dial to set the day.
8 Confirm the setting by pressing the
INFO dial.
First, set the distance under Dist.
1 Then use the INFO dial to select the
Arriv function.
2 Press and hold the INFO dial until given
audible confirmation.
3 Turn the INFO dial to set the estimated
time of arrival.
4 Press the INFO dial to finish setup.
The average speed (Speed Ø) will be
shown for 10 seconds.
This average speed will be updated during
the journey.
Note: All indicator and warning lights and
messages will operate normally if required.
Temp (when the outside temperature falls
or rises to between 26 and 38°F (–3 and
+3°C)) and D.T.E. (when the remaining fuel
is only sufficient for approx. 80 miles
(50 km) of driving) are even shown in Night
Panel model.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92
Instruments and controls
Under Profiler you can choose whether the
entire speedometer scale (0–160 mph) or
only part of the scale (0–90 mph) should be
illuminated in NIGHTPANEL mode.
Clock
Clock / Alarm
Settings can be made from Profiler.
Set Clock
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFOdial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Set Clock.
5 Select Manual.
Select Manual to set the time, year, month
and day.
RDS Adjust
Manual
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select System Settings using the INFO
dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Speed Scale Illum.
Select 0–160 mph or 0–90 mph.
Clock
11:30
Year
2003
Manual setting:
Month
Dec
System Settings
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
1 Turn the INFO dial to change the value.
2 Press the INFO dial once after each
setting (time, year, month and day) to
confirm the value.
Day
1 Mon
0–90 mph
Once you have selected the day, press the
INFO dial to finish setting and update the
clock.
Press the CLEAR button once to go back a
step when setting the time, year, month and
day manually.
Whentheremotecontrolisnotintheignition
switch, you can illuminate the clock for
5 seconds by pressing the INFO dial.
Press the CUSTOMIZE button to cancel
setting.
RDS setting: The time, year, month and
day can also be set from the RDS signal
(from RDS Adjust) provided that the RDS
signal from the current station contains this
information. This may vary between differ-
ent radio stations and different countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
93
Explanation of setting the clock.
Explanation of setting the alarm time.
Alarm
Settings can be made from Profiler.
Set Clock
Set Alarm 08:30
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
RDS Adjust:
Set Alarm 08:30:
In order to use this function,
the car's radio must be
tunedtoaFMstation known
to transmit a time signal.
Saab has no control over
the level of RBDS informa-
tion, or the content, being
transmitted by radio sta-
tions.
Set theyear, monthandday
under Manual if the current
radio station does not trans-
mit this information.
2 Select Clock / Alarm using the INFOdial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select Set Alarm 08:30.
Ifthealarmisnotactivated:setusingthe
INFO dial.
Ifthealarmisactivated(SetAlarm08:30
on): select Alarm on or Alarm off.
A new alarm time can be set.
Use the INFO dial.
Set Alarm 08:30 on:
A preset alarm time exists.
Select Alarm on or Alarm off.
Clock / Alarm
Set Alarm 08:30
Alarm
09:40
Manual:
Set Alarm 08:30 on
Alarm on
Use the INFO dial to set
time, year, month and day
manually.
Alarm off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94
Instruments and controls
System Settings
Under this heading you can make system
settings, such as change the display lan-
guage, units and service information.
Service Info
Service Data
Oil quality: xxx %.
System Settings
Language
(The number of languages can vary
between markets.)
xxxx days to service.
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select System Settings using the
INFO dial.
English
French
Service Type
Time for service.
German
Italian
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select the desired heading using the
INFO dial.
Time for intermediate
service.
Time for main and
intermediate service.
Spanish
Swedish
Unit
5 Press in the INFO dial.
Time for main service
Reset Service Ind.
Metric
Are you sure?
Yes No
Imperial
US
Speed Scale Illum.
0–160 mph
0–90 mph
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
95
Explanation of the various selections under
System Settings.
Language
Select the desired language. The num-
ber of languages can vary between
markets.
Unit
Select the desired group of units.
Speed Scale Illum.
Select the proportion of the speedo-
meter to be illuminated in NIGHT-
PANEL mode.
Service Info
Service Data:
Theapproximateconditionoftheoil
is shown here. 100% is equivalent
to new engine oil.
Service Type:
The type of service that is required
is shown here.
Reset Service Ind.:
The service indicator can be reset
here. This is normally done at the
dealer in connection with a service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96
Instruments and controls
Headlight levelling
(cars with xenon headlights)
Switches
Cars with xenon headlights are equipped
with an automatic headlight levelling sys-
tem, which self-calibrates each time the
vehicle is started.
If a fault arises in the automatic headlight
levelling system, the headlights will be
angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in
oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accord-
ingly as the range of the headlights will be
reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay
fuse box (see page 232).
Daytime Running Lights
The parking lights and daytime running
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
High beam can not be activated in this posi-
tion but headlight flasher can.
Parking lights
The parking lights can be turned on irre-
spective of the position of the ignition
switch. If the parking lights are on and the
driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn
them off will sound.
Do not use the parking lights alone while
driving.
A fault in the system will produce the follow-
ing message on the Saab Information Dis-
play (SID):
Light switches
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
The parking lights may be used in combina-
tion with the front fog lights (see page 98).
Special equipment is required for adjusting
the basic headlight alignment.
Headlights
Low beam headlights are turned on when
the ignition switch is turned to ON and
turned off when the switch is turned back to
LOCK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
97
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
A delay function allows the low beam head-
lights and back-up lights to remain on for
about30 secondsafterthedriver’sdoorhas
been closed.
To activate this function:
1 After turning off the engine, remove the
remote control.
2 Open the driver’s door.
3 Pull the control stalk all the way towards
the steering wheel.
The low beam headlights and reversing
lights will come on and remain on for
30 seconds when the door is closed.
Dipswitch
1 Headlight flasher
2 High/low beam
Adjusting instrument illumination
Instrument lighting
High/low beam
The brightness of the instrument lighting
can be adjusted by pressing the button (+ or
- signs on the button above the NIGHT-
PANEL button).
To switch between high and low beam, pull
the control stalk all the way towards the
steering wheel. (Headlight switch must be
ON.)
The
symbol on the main instrument
panel shows when the high beam is on.
Headlight flasher
To flash your headlights, pull the control
stalk half-way towards the steering wheel.
The high beam will remain on until you
release the stalk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98
Instruments and controls
Front fog light switch
Rear fog light switch
Turn signal & lane change indicators
1 Right
2 Left
Front fog lights
(certain variants only)
The front fog lights should be used in poor
visibility.
Rear fog light
To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear
foglightbuttonontheinstrumentpanel. The
headlights or front fog lights must be on.
Turn signal & lane change
indicators
The rear fog light is automatically turned off
when the engine is switched off. When the
carisnextstarted, therearfoglightwillhave
to be switched back on manually by press-
ing the rear fog light switch. If the engine is
restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog
light will remain on.
Theseareautomaticallyturnedoffwhenthe
engine is switched off. When the car is next
started, the fog lights will have to be
switched back on manually by pressing the
fog light switch. If the engine is restarted
within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will
remain on.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of front fog
lights.
The stalk switch has an intermediate,
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The stalk switch also has fixed positions for
indicating a right or left turn, that are can-
celled automatically when the steering
wheel is centered.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of rear fog light.
This frequency is also doubled if a trailer is
being towed and one of its indicator bulbs
breaks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls
99
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car
has to be left at the roadside on account
of a crash, engine trouble or a flat tire.
If you carry a warning triangle or flares,
theyshouldbesetupalongthesideof the
road 50–110 yds. (50–100 metres)
behind your vehicle. If the car is not
clearly visible (e.g. over the brow of a hill
or bridge), place the triangle/flare even
further back.
Hazard warning light switch
Back-Up
The back-up lights come on automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or selected
with the ignition switched on.
Button for accessory, Sport
Sedan
This button can be used for accessories,
such as extra lights.
Hazard warning lights
The button for the hazard warning lights is
located on the climate control panel.
When the button is pressed, all the direction
indicators and the symbol in thebuttonflash
simultaneously.
If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency
with which the indicators flash will be
doubled.
Hazard warning lights should only be used
if, becauseofanaccidentorbreakdown, the
car constitutes a hazard to other road users.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100
Instruments and controls
Priority of audible information
Wipers and washers
Sound from various functions in the car,
such as the direction indicators, parking
assistance and seatbelt reminders, come
from the same sound source: the car’s
sound system. If two or more of these func-
tions are active simultaneously, the most
important function at that time will be priori-
tized.
If, for example, the direction indicators are
active when you engage reverse, the park-
ingassistance(iffitted)willbeheardinstead
of the direction indicators. When reverse is
disengaged, the direction indicators will be
heard, if they are still active.
Windshield wipers
Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that
will produce a single sweep of the wipers.
In position 2 you can set the delay period for
intermittentwipingusingthethumbwheelon
the stalk switch. There are 5 delay periods
from which to choose, ranging from 2 to
15 seconds.
Thewipers always return to theirhome posi-
tion when the ignition is turned off.
To leave the wipers positioned vertically on
Windshield wipers
0 OFF
1 Single sweep
remote control.
2 Activate the wipers within the next
16 seconds by pressing the stalk switch
down.
2 Intermittent wiping
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing (certain
variants only)
When the ignition is next switched on the
wipers will return to their home position.
Washers
Activate the washers by pulling the stalk
switch towards the steering wheel.
When the washers are operated, the wipers
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on
how long the washers were kept on. If
the speed of the car is less than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after roughly 8 seconds.
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 101
Rain sensor
(option)
WARNING
Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is
ONtoavoidpersonalinjurywhenclearing
snow and ice from the windshield.
NOTICE
Turn the rain sensor off before washing
the car in an automatic carwash, to avoid
damaging the windshield wipers.
Control for setting wiper delay
0 OFF
1 Single sweep
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
3 Low speed
4 High speed
5 Windshield and headlight washing (certain
variants only)
The rain sensor automatically controls the
windshield wipers. The sensor is located on
the windshield beside the rearview mirror.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
The system varies the frequency of wiping
between single sweeps and continuous
wiping, depending on the amount of pre-
cipitation.
Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk
switch to the AUTO position. The wipers
make one sweep for reference to see how
much water is on the windshield. In the
future, the sensor compares the amount of
water on the windshield with this reference
value.
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated automatically while the windshield is
washed. The recirculation symbol will how-
ever not light up. This function is optional;
contact a Saab dealer. This automatic recir-
culation is the factory default setting as long
as the system is working in full "AUTO"
mode with no customized settings.
Headlight washers
(certain variants only)
Theheadlightsarewashedatthesametime
as the windshield if the headlights are on.
The headlights are washed every fifth time
the windshield washers are used or if two
(2) minutes have elapsed since the wind-
shield was last washed.
The headlight washers are not activated at
speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102
Instruments and controls
Ifthestalk switch isleft inthe AUTO position
when the engine is switched off, when the
engine is next started it must first be moved
tothe 0or 3 position and then back toAUTO
to reactivate the sensor.
If the system malfunctions, the wipers will
operate at low speed when the stalk switch
is set to the AUTO position.
Adjusting sensitivity
Explanation of sensor sensitivity.
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted under Profiler. If you increase the
sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep
for reference.
High
The sensor is set to high sensitivity.
The wipers start when there is only
a small amount of water on
the windshield.
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Rain Sensor using the INFO dial.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
4 Select the sensitivity by turning the dial.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Medium
The sensor is set to normal sensitivity.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Low
The sensor is set to low sensitivity (wip-
ers operate only with a large amount of
water on the windshield, i.e., down-
pour).
Rain Sensor
High
Medium
Low
The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected
by the amount of daylight. The sensor is
somewhat more sensitive at night. This
adjustment is automatic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 103
Manual climate-control
system
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inlet grille at the bottom edge of the wind-
shield. It passes through a filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in theparcelshelf. It is thenled
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
To optimize the performance of the A/C sys-
tem, all windows and the sunroof should be
shut.
To reduce potential misting on theinsides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more fre-
quently.
Control panel: manual climate control
1 Temperature
6 Rear window/door mirror heating
7 Hazard warning lights
2 Fan speed
8 Air conditioning (A/C)
3 Air distribution
4 Seat heating, front right seat
5 Recirculation
9 Seat heating, front left seat
Temperature control
The temperature of the incoming air can
be infinitely varied using the temperature
control.
Fan
The output of air is controlled by the fan
speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104
Instruments and controls
Air distribution
The air distribution control is used to direct the flow of air to the
defroster, panel and floor vents.
The control also permits settings in between the three main settings
defroster, panel and floor:
Recommended settings in severe cold
On starting with a cold engine, set the fan speed to 2 or 3 and select
maximum heat and defroster to heat the cabin and demist the wind-
shield as quickly as possible.
When the engine is warmer and the temperature gauge starts to
rise, fan setting 4 may be chosen. Once the windshield is clear, the
• defroster and floor
air distribution control should be turned to
.
If the rear seat passengers desire more warmth to the feet, turn the
distribution knob one step clockwise.
How quickly the engine warms up will depend on how the car is
driven. It will take longer for the engine to warm up if the car is driven
in a high gear at low engine speeds, such as in town, than if it is
driven at high engine speeds on a highway, for example.
Do not use fan speed 5. This is primarily intended for rapid cooling
during the summer. Using it in cold weather will delay the engine
warm-up time and providing heat to the passenger compartment.
• panel and floor
• defroster, panel and floor (11 o’clock position)
To counter cold drafts from the front side windows when the control
has been set to defroster or floor, a small flow of air issues from
the outer vents on the fascia.
As the winter comfort setting, we recommend that the distribution
knob be turned to
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 105
Settings
for various
weather
conditions
Winter – defroster
Winter – comfort setting
Summer – overcast
Summer – sunny
Defroster
Panel
Floor
Defroster, panel and floor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106
Instruments and controls
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
Air conditioning (A/C)
The air conditioning is combined with the
conventional climate control system and
is switched on by pressing the
ton, provided that the fan control is in
position 1-5.
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
but-
Recirculation
If the engine coolant gets too hot, the A/C
compressor will be turned off.
Panel vent
When the
button is pressed, the reg-
ular air intake will be closed. In this mode,
the air inside the cabin is recirculated.
Use recirculation when you wish for rapid
cooling at very high outside temperatures.
Switch the air conditioning (A/C) on first.
If necessary, recirculation can be switched
on manually to avoid unpleasant air from
entering the car.
Convertible: When the soft top or all the
windows are open in a hot, humid climate, it
is recommended to switch off the air condi-
tioning to save fuel. Also, if the air condition-
ing is on, condensation may form on cold
surfaces such as the floor air ducts.
Air vents
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
Only use recirculation for a short period
of time at temperatures lower than 50°F
(+10°C), such as to avoid unpleasant air.
Mist or ice may otherwise form on the
windows.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 107
Electrically heated rear
window/external mirrors
Electric heating, front
seats (option)
This button is located under the fan speed
control.
Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront
seats are heated.
Always switch off theheatingas soon as the
rear window is free from ice and mist. It will
beturnedoff automaticallyafter 12 minutes.
Refrain from placing sharp objects on the
parcel shelf, to avoid damaging the heating
element.
The heating is thermostatically controlled
and set at approx. 104°F (40°C).
Switch off the seat heating once the seat is
warm.
Convertible: The rear window heating is
not turned on if the soft top is folded down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108
Instruments and controls
Automatic climate-
control system (ACC)
Freshairforthecabinisdrawninthroughan
inlet at the bottom edge of the windshield. It
passes through an effective filter before
reaching the climate control system and
delivery into the cabin. The air is evacuated
via openings in theparcelshelf. It is thenled
through outlets on either side of the car
behind the rear bumper.
The Automatic Climate-Control system
(ACC) automatically maintains the desired
cabin temperature, regardless of the
weather outside.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way.
Note that heating or cooling is not
speeded up by setting the temperature
higher or lower than the final tempera-
ture you desire.
To optimize the performance of the air con-
ditioning system, all windows and the sun-
roof should be shut. The air vents in the
fascia must be open.
ACC panel
10 Manual increase of fan speed
11 Hazard warning lights
12 Manual decrease of fan speed
13 Seat heating, front left seat
1 Temperature setting: left-hand side
2 Manual setting of air distribution
3 Recirculation
4 AUTO (automatic regulation)
5 A/C
6 Defroster
7 Rear window heating
8 Temperature setting: right-hand side
9 Seat heating, front right seat
The incoming air is treated in three stages:
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled; and finally, if required,
it is heated.
To reduce potential misting on theinsides of
the windows, the glass should be cleaned
with a quality glass cleaner. How often this
will need to be done depends on how clean
the air is - if there are smokers in the car, the
windows will need to be cleaned more
frequently.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 109
The displayed temperature is not the actual
air temperature but corresponds to the
comfort level normally experienced at that
temperature after allowance has been
made for the airflow, relative humidity, solar
radiation, and so on, currently prevailing
inside the car.
Temperature control
The cabin is divided into two temperature
zones:
1 Driver’s zone.
2 Passenger zone.
The temperature in the rear seat will be a
mixture of the two zones.
If you choose the single zone setting, the
entire cabin is treated as one zone. If you
choose the dual zone setting, settings can
be made separately for the driver’s zone
and passenger zone.
Select between single and dual zone set-
tings under Profiler (see page 117).
The cabin temperature can be set to
between58–82°F(15–27°C).Inaddition,HI
(maximum heating and high fan speed) and
LO (maximum cooling and maximum fan
speed) can be selected. HI and LO can only
be selected for the passenger zone if the
driver has selected the same setting.
• The most usual temperature setting is
between 66–74°F (19–23°C), depending
is worn.
• Change the temperature setting in 2°F
(1°C) steps.
• Make sure the air vents are open when
cooling the cabin in warm weather.
Settings when HI is selected:
Panel vent
Air vents
• Maximum heat
The air vents swivel universally, so that air
can be directed as desired. In winter, for
instance, the outer vents can be directed
onto the door windows for enhanced
demisting.
The amount of air can be individually con-
trolled by the regulator on each vent. If you
wish to reduce the airflow, start by half-
shutting the vent in question.
• Air distribution to windshield and floor
• High fan speed (6 bars on the fan display).
Settings when LO is selected:
• Maximum cooling
• Air distribution to air vents in fascia
• Maximum fan speed (8 bars on the fan
display).
• Recirculation ON (depending on outside
temperature).
Certain variants have an air vent on the rear
of the floor console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110
Instruments and controls
The system uses four sensors:
• Outside air temperature sensor
• Cabin air temperature sensor
• Sun sensor
• Blendedairtemperaturesensors(located
in the heater unit and the outer panel vent
duct).
The sun sensor is located centrally on the
top of the fascia.
Note:
If the sun sensor is covered, the ACC
system will not be able to regulate the cabin
climate as intended, especially in strong
sunshine.
Condensation water
When the A/C compressor is on, the incom-
ing air is dehumidified. The resulting con-
densation water is drained away through an
outlet under the car.
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to
be seen dripping from this outlet when the
car is parked. The warmer the ambient air
and the higher the humidity, the more con-
densation will form.
Sun- and cabin sensor, Sport Sedan
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
Sun- and cabin sensor, Convertible
1 Sun sensor
2 Cabin temperature sensor
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 111
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.
Ifamanualfunctionis selected, itwillbelockedinbutotherfunctions
will be controlled automatically.
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.
The A/C compressor must be turned on and off
manually with the AC button.
The compressor can only be turned on or off while
the engine is running.
This function has two modes:
• AC – The system cools and dehumidifies the
incoming air. This symbol is not shown in the
display.
• AC-OFF – The A/C compressor is switched off.
The incoming air is not cooled or dehumidified.
See also Profiler on page 117.
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir-
culation will be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched off at approx. 32°F (0 °C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is
switched on at approx. 40°F (+5 °C).
If, when starting the car, the outside air temperature
is between 32°F and 40°F (0 and +5 °C), the A/C
compressor is switched on.
Pressing AUTO once will cancelall previous manual
air distribution selections.
When the engine is started, the ACC system will be
in AUTO mode, provided that no air distribution set-
tings are programmed under Profiler (see
page 117).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112
Instruments and controls
When the system is switched OFF:
• The fan and A/C compressor are switched off.
• The temperature control is set to 0 % heat.
• The current air distribution setting is retained.
• Recirculation can be selected.
To turn the system OFF, press and hold (or press
repeatedly) the button to reduce the fan speed until
the fan is switched off. Then release the button and
press it once more.
The A/C compressor will now be disengaged. To re-
engage the A/C, press one of the following buttons:
• The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
engaged, and the air distribution
and fan speed will switch to AUTO.
The rear window and door mirror heating can be
controlled manually or automatically (refer to
Profiler).
Switch off the rear window and door mirror heating
as soon as the glass is clear. The heating will be
turned off automatically after 12 minutes.
Refrain from placing sharp objects on the parcel
shelf, to avoid damaging the heating element.
• Higher fan speed
The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
engaged, the air distribution will return to its previ-
ous setting and fan speed will increase.
• Defroster
The A/C compressor will be
switched on if it was previously
disengaged, the air distribution will switch to
Defroster and the fan speed will increase (6 bars
on the display out of a maximum of 8).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 113
Air distribution
Recirculation is controlled manually.
Recirculation is not selected when the engine is
started (fresh air mode).
When defroster is chosen, all the front windows are
demisted:
• High fan speed
• The air is directed to the defroster vents
• Normal temperature control
• Recirculation OFF
• Rear window and door mirror heating ON.
The system will remain in defroster mode until the
Press
or
to increase or decrease the fan
speed. This sets the fan speed (fan speed shownon
display).
Refer also to Profiler regarding the possibility to
increase/decrease the automatic fan speed.
or
button is pressed.
The following three buttons for air distribution can be selected indi-
vidually or in combination. Press the button or selection of buttons
to produce the airflow you desire. Pressing the same button twice
will return the system to AUTO. You can also select automatic air
distribution by pressing the AUTO button.
Initial air distribution to take effect on starting the engine can be set
under Profiler (see page 117).
Airflow to windshield vents.
Airflow to facia air vents.
Airflow to floor vents.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114
Instruments and controls
Shown below are several examples of air distribution.
Floor, front and rear
Windshield
Panel
Windshield – floor (front and rear)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 115
Formation of ice and mist in extreme weather
conditions
It is only in the most extreme conditions that icing and misting of
window glass are likely to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or
severecoldcoupledwithhighrelativehumidity,orwhenpassengers
are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following mea-
sures are recommended if such problems should occur:
1 Select
and set the temperature to 70°F (21°C)
2 Select
. If this is not enough...
3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not enough...
4 Select a higher temperature.
Panel – floor (front and rear)
Windshield – panel – floor (front and rear)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116
Instruments and controls
Calibration
Electric heating, front
seats (option)
Calibration is performed automatically
everyfifthtimethecaris startedafterhaving
been switched off for more than 2 hours or
if the battery has been disconnected.
Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront
seats are heated.
Heating is thermostatically controlled.
Heating is controlled manually but can also
be automatic. Refer to Profiler on page 117.
Threeheatinglevelsareavailable. Pressing
thebuttononcewillturntheheatingonatfull
power. Pressing the button a total of 4 times
will turn the heating off.
Programming
A number of functions can be customized
under Profiler (see page 117). Further cus-
tomizations can be made at a Saab dealer.
Tips
(before contacting a Saab workshop)
•
•
•
= full.
• If you feel that the ACC system is not func-
tioning satisfactorily, select "Default
= medium.
= low.
Settings" under Profiler (see page 117.
• To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated automatically while the windshield
is washed. The recirculation symbol will
however not light up. This function is
optional; contact a Saab dealer. This
automatic recirculation is the factory
default setting as long as the system is
working in full "AUTO" model with no
customized settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 117
ACC- Convertible
Profiler
Whenthesoft topisfolded, the ACCsystem
switches to manual temperature control.
There are eleven temperature settings: 0–
10.
Some of the functions of the ACC system
can be customized.
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Climate System using the
INFO dial.
The system adjusts itself as follows:
• AUTO goes out.
• Heating, airdistributionandfanspeedare
not affected.
• Recirculation and rear window heating
are cut out.
• The A/C compressor is switched off (man-
ual activation is possible by pressing the
AC button).
3 Press in the INFO dial.
ACC display when soft top folded
4 Select Rear Defroster, Heated Seats,
Fan Settings, Air Distribution, A/C
Mode, Dual/Single Zone or Default
Settings by turning the dial.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Once you have adjusted the ACC system
settings under Profiler, CUSTOMIZE will
appear on the ACC display.
All manual selections are possible with the
exception of rear window heating.
When the soft top is raised, the system
reverts to the AUTO mode and the previous
set temperature.
Note: When the soft top or all the windows
are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the
air conditioning on manually can cause con-
densation to form on cold surfaces, such as
the air ducts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118
Instruments and controls
Heated Seats
A/C Mode
Auto
Climate System
Rear Defroster
Auto
Auto:
The front seat heating is controlled
automatically.
A/C off
Select the level by repeatedly
pressing the appropriate button on
the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol
= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow
= low. The selected heating setting
is saved when the engine is
switched off. Note: The symbol on
the ACC panel goes out if the heat-
ing is turned off automatically by the
system.
Dual/Single Zone
Dual zone
Single zone
Default Settings
Are you sure?
Yes No
Manual
Heated Seats
Auto
Manual
Fan Settings
High speed
Medium speed
Low speed
Air Distribution
Auto
Manual:
Explanation of how the ACC system can be
customized under Profiler.
See Electric heating, front seats
(option) on page 116.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Rear Defroster
Auto:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is controlled automatically.
This is one of the Default Settings.
Manual
Windshield
Panel
Manual:
The rear window and door mirror
heating is switched on with
the button on ACC panel.
Floor
Convertible: The rear window heating
cannot be turned on when the soft top is
folded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and controls 119
Fan Settings
Dual/Single Zone
High speed:
A/C Mode
Dual zone:
This selection give a slightly higher
Auto:
Individual temperature setting for
each zone (see page 109). The sys-
tem saves the settings when the
engine is switched off. This is one of
the Default Settings.
fan speed than Medium speed
though with continued automatic
regulation.
Automatic engagement and disen-
gagement of the A/C. This is one of
the Default Settings.
Medium speed:
A/C off:
Single zone:
Normalautomaticfanspeed. This is
one of the Default Settings.
Low speed:
A/C compressor OFF (see also
page 111). The A/C compressor
can be activated temporarily by
pressing the AC or AUTO button
while on the road and if the outside
temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).
The A/C will be off the next time the
engine is started, if the engine has
been switched off for more than
2 hours.
Common temperature setting when
the engine is started. If the temper-
aturesettingforthepassengerzone
ischanged, thesystemwillswitchto
Dual zone control. Single zone con-
trol will return the next time the
This selection give a slightly lower
fan speed than Medium speed
though with continued automatic
regulation.
engine is started having been
switched off for more than 2 hours.
Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated
automatically when the soft top is open.
Air Distribution
Convertible: The A/C compressor is
switched off when the soft top is folded
down.
Further customizations to this function can
be made at a Saab dealer.
• The A/C compressor can be on even
when the soft top is folded down.
Auto:
The ACC system adapts air tem-
perature and distribution to the pre-
vailing conditions. This is one of the
Default Settings.
Manual:
• The A/C compressor can be set to
operate as when the soft top was last
folded down.
Windshield:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to the windshield.
Panel:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to air vents in the fascia.
Floor:
The ACC system directs almost
all air to the floor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120
Instruments and controls
(This page has been left blank.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 121
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment __________ 122
Electric windows_______ 123
Sunroof ______________ 126
Interior lighting ________ 129
Cup holder____________ 130
Power Outlet __________ 132
Storage compartments__ 132
Rearview mirrors_______ 134
Trunk ________________ 140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Interior equipment
Steering wheel
adjustment
WARNING
Only adjust the steering wheel while the
car is stationary so that you are not
distracted from the traffic.
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be adjusted.
There is a release lever under the steering
column.
Lever for steering wheel adjustment
Horn signal
Activate the horn by pressing one of the
three areas shown above on the steering
wheel pad.
1 Pull down the lever to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.
3 Raise the lever to the locked position to
lock the steering wheel in position.
When returning the release lever to its
locked position, you may need to adjust the
position of the steering wheel slightly to
allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-
rectly.
Steering wheel lock, see page 148.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 123
Electric windows
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the side windows. May cause serious
or fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric windows, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
Window switches
Window switch in rear door
• The person operating the electric
window is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
window openings, before raising the
window.
Windows having the automatic closingfunc-
tion (option) can be operated as long as the
car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has
passed since the remote control was
removed from the ignition switch.
Comfort opening
(option, certain variants only)
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the sunroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
During comfort opening of the windows,
sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
reduced by approximately half.
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
To open
Press down the front edge of the button one
step.
The window will stop when it is fully open or
when the button is released.
Automatic opening: Press the button all
The electric windows are operated by
means of switches in the door armrests.
For theelectricwindowstowork, theremote
control must be in the ON position in the
ignition switch.
Convertible: For the remote opening of the
soft top, refer to page 58.
the way down and release it.
At the end of a journey and having removed
the remote control, you can still operate the
windows, so long as neither of the front
doors has been opened.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124
Interior equipment
To close
Pinch protection
(if equipped)
On certain model variants, the electric win-
dows are equipped with pinch protection.
This is activated if something gets trapped
between the window pane and door frame
stop and lower slightly.
WARNING
Take care when closing a window to
ensure that no one gets caught.
Raise the front edge of the button one step.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
The window will stop when it is fully closed
or when the button is released.
Automatic closing (option, certain vari-
ants only): Raise the button all the way and
release it. If the window does not close auto-
matically, refer to Calibration on page 125.
WARNING
Button for temporary deactivation of rear
door window switches and temporary
override of window pinch protection
Make sure nothing obstructs the window
when it is closed without pinch protection.
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in, the
pinch protection can be temporarily disen-
gaged and the window closed.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the
button on the
driver’s door while operating the window
in question.
3 Close the window in question.
The pinch protection will be active the next
time a window is operated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 125
Calibration
Deactivating the rear window
switches
WARNING
The
inthe driver’s doordeactivates the
window switches in the rear doors.
The pinch protection will not be engaged
after a power break until the electric
windows have been calibrated.
The illuminated switch will change color
from green to orange (deactivated).
After a loss of battery power, or if the auto-
matic closing feature does not work, the
electric windows must be calibrated for the
pinch protection to work.
Fully open and close the windows at least
twice. Youwillhearachimeaftersuccessful
calibration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126
Interior equipment
Sunroof
(optional)
WARNING
Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-
ing the electric sunroof. Risk of serious or
fatal injuries!
• Always remove the remote control
from the ignition switch when you
leave the car. This will prevent
personal injury caused by the activa-
tion of the electric sunroof, for exam-
ple, due to children playing.
Sunroof control
3 Manually controlled closing
4 Automatic closing
1 Manually controlled opening
2 Automatic opening
5 Ventilation position
• The person operating the electric
sunroof is responsible for ensuring
that no one, especially a child, has
their head, hands or fingers in the
opening, before closing the sunroof.
Sunroof without automatic opening
To open
Manually controlled opening
Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see
illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
release the control or once it is fully open.
Slidethecontrolrearwardtoitsfirstposition.
The sunroof will halt when you release the
control. If you do not release the control, the
sunroof will open to the comfort position. To
openthesunrooffurther, releasethecontrol
and then once again press it rearward.
• Do not stick any part of the body or the
head out through an open window
while the car is moving.
The sunroof isoperated by the control in the
roof console. For the sunroof to work, the
remote control must be in the ON position in
the ignition switch.
If the car is equipped with windows having
the automatic closing function, the sunroof
canbeopenedandclosedsolongasthecar
is unlocked until 20 minutes has passed
since the remote control was removed from
the ignition switch.
Automatic opening
Slide the control rearward to the second
position and release it. The sunroof will
open to the comfort position. To open the
sunroof further, slide the control rearward a
second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 127
Ventilation position (rear edge of
sunroof open)
• To open – press in the control.
• To close – slide the control forward to the
second position.
It is also possible to select the ventilation
position when the sunroof is open by press-
inginthecontrol. Thesunroofwillthenclose
automatically. Press the control once
more to open the sunroof to its ventilation
position.
If you wish to open the sunroof fully from
the ventilation position, you must first close
it (slide the control forward). You can then
slide the control rearward to open the sun-
roof.
To close
Comfort opening
(option, certain variants only)
Comfort opening is the remote opening of
windows and the sunroof.
Press and hold the unlocking button on the
remote control until the windows and
optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).
During comfort opening of the windows,
sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is
reduced by approximately half.
If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it
will not open.
WARNING
Exercise great care when closing the
sunroof to ensure that nothing gets
trapped.
Manually controlled closing
Slide the control forward to its first position.
The sunroof will halt when you release the
control.
Convertible: For the remote opening of the
soft top, refer to page 58.
Automaticclosing (certain variantsonly)
Slide the control forward to its second posi-
tion and release it. The sunroof will close
fully.
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind.
The sunroof pinch protection halts closing
and opens the sunroof slightly if something
obstructs closing.
Sunroof without automatic closing
• To open – press the control up.
• To close – slide the control forward to
position 3.
Sunroof without automatic closing
Slide the control forward to position 3 (see
illustration). The sunroof will stop when you
release the control or once it is fully closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128
Interior equipment
Pinch protection
(if equipped)
WARNING
Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof
when it is closed without pinch protection.
The sunroof is equipped with pinch protec-
tion. This is activated if something gets
trapped when the sunroof is being closed.
The sunroof will stop and open slightly.
Temporary overriding the pinch protec-
tion
If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-
tance that the pinch protection cuts in (sun-
roof cannot be closed), the pinch protection
can be temporarily disengaged.
Button for overriding the sunroof pinch
protection
Emergency operation of the
sunroof
In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-
trical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with a screwdriver.
Remove thelens from theroof console. Use
a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot
in the center of the motor shaft and turn the
screwdriver.
Turn clockwise to close the sunroof when in
ventilation position.
1 Make sure the ignition is ON.
2 Press and hold the
button on the
driver’s door whileoperating the window
in question.
3 Close the sunroof with the button on the
roof console.
The pinch protection will be operative the
next time the sunroof is operated.
Turn counter-clockwise to close when in
open position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 129
Rear lighting
1 Reading lights
2 Roof light
1 Interior lighting always off
2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors
3 Interior lighting on continuously
The glovebox lightingis switched on andoff
automatically when the glove box is opened
and closed.
When the switch is in the mid-position(door-
activated), the interior lighting will come on:
Interior lighting
• When the car is unlocked.
Theinteriorlightingconsistsofonefrontand
one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour-
tesy lights in the doors (certain variants
only). The light switch for the interiorlighting
is located on the roof console by the rear-
view mirror.
• When a door is opened and the ignition is
OFF.
• When the remote control is removed from
the ignition switch.
The lighting goes out:
• When the car is locked.
• When the ignition is turned on.
• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.
The lights are dimmed out gradually.
If a door is left open and the light switch is in
position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the
interior lighting will be switched off automat-
ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130
Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
The trunk lighting is switched on and off
when the trunk lid is opened and closed.
Cup holder
(option)
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
WARNING
• The cup holder should not be used to
hold cups made of china or glass as
these can cause personal injury in the
event of a crash.
• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles
or aluminium cans.
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot
drinks.
Sun visor with vanity mirror
Sun visor
Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on
the sun visors. The lighting comes on when
the cover is raised.
NOTICE
Take care not to spill any liquid on the
audio system , the ignition switch or the
like when using the cup holders. Soft
drinks in particular can cause malfunc-
tions.
Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in
the center console compartment between
the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport
Sedan). The cup holder between the seats
can beraisedif you wish to use the compart-
ment for storage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 131
Cup holder in fascia
Cup holder in center console compart-
ment between front seats (certain variants
only)
Cup holder in rear seat cushion (Sport
Sedan)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132
Interior equipment
Power Outlet
(if equipped)
Storage compartments
You can use the electrical socket in the stor-
age compartment under the armrest
WARNING
between the front seats to charge a mobile
phone, for example. There is a recess on
each side of the compartment which will
accept a lead so that you can close the lid
without damaging the charger lead.
The glove box must be closed while trav-
elling. An open glove box door could
cause personal injury in the event of a
crash.
There are additional storage compartments
in the rear seat armrest, below the front ash-
tray and in the doors.
WARNING
The maximum output of the cigarette
lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating
ofthesocketinthecompartmentbetween
the seats is the same. Overloading can
result in melting or even fire.
Open the glove box with the button on the
left of the moulding.
Convertible has lockable glove box. Use
the traditionally key, see page 48.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 133
Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold air
(cars with ACC only).
This allows the storage of chocolate and
chilled drinks, for example.
Card holder
Storage compartment between front seats
Storage pocket on back of seats
Storage pocket on front edge of seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134
Interior equipment
Rearview mirrors
Door mirrors
To adjust
The door mirrors are electrically adjustable
and heated. The controls for adjusting the
mirrors are on the driver’s door:
1 Select a door mirror with the upper
button.
2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.
The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-
ually by gently pressing the glass in the
desired direction.
Retracting a door mirror
1 Selection of mirror
2 Touch pad for adjustment
3 Reversing position (electric/optional)
Themirrorheatingisturnedontogetherwith
the rear window heating.
If the car has an electrically adjustable
driver’s seat with memory, the mirror
settings are stored in the memory (see
page 19).
Manual retraction
Reversing position
On certain model variants, the passenger-
side mirror glass can be angled down to
if knocked. The mirrors can also be
retractedmanually.Thiscanbeusefulwhen
parking in tight spaces, such as on the car
deckofaferry.Remembertoreturnthedoor
mirrors to their normal positions before
driving off.
facilitate reversing. Press the
button
shown in the illustration. This is located
under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its
normal position by pressing the button
again. The mirror will also return to its
normal position if you drive forward approx-
imately 22 yds. (20 meters).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 135
Interior rearview mirror with
autodimming
(if equipped)
The system is activated when the forward-
facing sensor detects that it is dark outside
and the rear-facing sensor detects, for
example, if the car following has not
dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror
is then darkened to prevent the strong light
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when
the strong light source diminishes.
Mirror position lever
1 Normal position
2 Antidazzle position
Mirror with autodimming
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 Autodimming ON/OFF
3 Rear-facing sensor
The autodimming function can be turned
OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe
rear-view mirror.
NOTE!
Towing a trailer can cause the system to
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may
shaded by the trailer.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is of the auto-
dimming type and can be deflected with the
leveronitsunderside. Certainvariantshave
an autodimming rearview mirror.
The lever should be in the normal position
when you adjust the mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136
Interior equipment
Preparations for first-time programming
Interior rearview mirror with
garage opener, autodimming
function and compass
(if equipped
the first time, you must delete any factory
codes.
Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not
holdforlongerthat 30 seconds. Thegarage
opener is now in the train(orlearning)mode
and can be programmed at any time begin-
ning with "Programming" - step 2.
WARNING
Makesurethat peopleandobjectsareout
of the way of moving door or gate to
prevent potential harm or damage.
When programming the garage opener,
you may be operating a garage door or
gate operator. Therefore it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
Programming
Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe
frequencies of three different remote con-
trols.
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
Do not use the garage opener with any
garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This includes
any garage door opener model manufac-
tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an
object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
The battery in the remote control should be
fairly new for programming to work well.
Do not repeat "Programming" - step two
to train additional devices to a second or
third button. Begin with "Programming" -
step three.
1 Turn the ignition ON.
Retain your original garage door opener
(transmitter) for future programming proce-
dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed garage opener buttons be
erased for security purposes, see
page 138.
2 Press and hold the two outer buttons
(buttons one and three) - releasing only
when the indicator light begins to flash
(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and
do not repeat step two to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmit-
ter to the remaining two buttons.
3 Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away
from the button you wish to program
while keeping the indicator light in view.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 137
The transmitter should face the mirror
from below or left side of the mirror.
4 Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen and hand-held transmitter
buttons. Do not release the buttons
until step 5 has been completed.
Note: Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to replace
this Programming Step 4 with procedures
noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-
gramming" section.
5 After the indicator light changes from a
slow to a rapidly blinking light, release
both the mirror and hand-held transmit-
ter buttons.
6 Press and hold the just-trained button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is
complete and your device should acti-
vate when the button is pressed and
released.
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step nine.
9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed button. Repeat the
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission -
which may not be long enough for the
garage opener to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
"time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator by
using the "Programming" procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
"Programming " step 4 with the following:
Note: Ifprogrammingagaragedooropener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the "cycling" process to pre-
vent possible overheating.
4 Continue to press and hold the button
while you press and release - every two
seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmit-
ter until the frequency signal has success-
fully been accepted by the garage opener.
(The indicator light willflash slowly and then
rapidly.)
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
The garage opener should now activate
your rolling code equipped device.
Note: To program the remaining two but-
tons, begin with "Programming" - step
three. Do not repeat step two.
Proceed with "Programming" step five to
complete.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two
seconds and then turns to a constant
light continue with "Programming"
steps 7-9 to complete the programming of
a rolling code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
7 At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
NOTICE
Switch off the power supply to the garage
door or gate (or park the car beyond the
range of the remote control) while
programming using the "cycling" method
to prevent damaging the electrical motor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138
Interior equipment
Reprogramming a single button
Opening a garage door
To program a device to the garage opener
using a button previously trained, follow
these steps:
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed button. Activation will now
occurforthetraineddevice(i.e.garagedoor
opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter
of the device may also be used at any time.
1 Press and hold the desired button. DO
NOT release the button.
2 Theindicatorlightwillbegintoflashafter
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, proceed with "Programming" -
step 3.
Erasing the three buttons
To erase programming from the three but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be erased
but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined
below), follow the step noted:
Buttons for garage opener, autodimming
and compass
1–3 Garage opener
4 LED
5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF
6 Compass bearing
• Press and hold the two outer buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after
20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do
not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The
garage opener is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed
atanytimebeginningwith"Programming"
- step 3.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
must accept any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation.
Autodimming
Pressbutton5brieflytoswitchautodimming
onoroff.Whenautodimmingisswitchedon,
a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-
dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is
switchedoff. Seepage 135foradescription
of operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 139
Compass
The compass is built into the rearview mir-
ror.Thecompassbearingisdisplayedinthe
top right-hand corner of the mirror and is
updated every other second. The compass
displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,
E, etc.
Switch the compass display on and off by
pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-
tration on page 138.
Changing zones
Theearth’smagneticfieldvariesdepending
on one’s position on the globe. If you drive
your car from one magnetic zone to another
thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged
to ensure a correct bearing.
Compass zones in USA
Compass zones in Canada
Calibration
Calibration is performed automatically
during travel.
If, for any reason, a manual calibration is
needed perform as follows:
1 Study the illustrations to determine the
correct zone.
2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is
shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).
The zone number is now also shown.
3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the
zone number. There are 15 zones from
which to choose. Once the correct zone
is selected, release the button and wait
4 seconds. The compass will now
display the bearing.
1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and
the compass bearing are displayed
(approx. 9 s).
2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or
drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer
displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140
Interior equipment
Trunk
Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan
Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.
WARNING
• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into
position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the
event of heavy braking or a crash.
• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During
sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk
can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very
susceptible to heat stroke.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Neverplaceheavyobjectsontheparcelshelf.Thereisalways
a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a
crash. See also page 189.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the
center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.
• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is
locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-
wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin
during heavy breaking or a crash.
• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to
a suitable height before riding in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 141
For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and
the wide part can be folded down separately.
Nexttothehingesinthetrunkarehandlesforunlockingtherearseat
backrests.
The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and
the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.
1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the
trunk.
2 Fold the backrest forward.
Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make
sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does
not get caught.
If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-
ingmessageisdisplayedontheSID(equivalentmessagedisplayed
for right-hand backrest):
Rear left seat backrest
unlocked.
Trunk Release Handle, see page 143.
Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, see page 144.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142
Interior equipment
Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan
Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.
WARNING
safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-
ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the
event of a crash.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its
handling characteristics (see page 268).
A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to
enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and
apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving
off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.
• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.
Thereisalockontherearsideofthehatch. Usethistolockorunlock
the hatch. The position of the lock is designed to prevent unautho-
rized persons from accessing the trunk from inside the cabin.
To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The
hatch is now locked.
To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock
the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interior equipment 143
• Secure small items if the backrest is
folded down. Small items can also be
thrown around inside the car and
cause personal injury.
• The elastic cargo net (accessory) is
only designed for light objects that are
to be kept in place while driving
• Elastic cargo net (accessory): WARN-
ING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch. ALWAYS keep face and body
out of recoil path. DO NOT use when
strap has visible signs of wear or
damage.
Trunk Release Handle
Tie down eyes in the trunk
• The rear seat must be in the upright
position to protect against load
displacement in the event of a crash.
Trunk Release Handle
Tie down eyes
There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the latch.
This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open
the trunk from inside.
There are tie down eyes in the trunk that
should be used to secure loads. In general,
loads should be placed as far forward and
as low down as possible in the trunk.
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the
car, as this will alter its handling char-
acteristics (see page 268).
• Match your speed and driving style to
how the car is loaded. The handling
characteristics of the car can be
affected since a load in the trunk will
alter the car’s center of gravity.
WARNING
NOTICE
• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place
smaller and lighter bags on top.
The trunk release handle was not
designed to be used to tie down the trunk
lid or as an anchor point when securing
items in the trunk. Improper use of the
trunk release could damage it.
• Secure heavy and bulky items using
the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.
This will avert the danger of luggage
flying around if the car should brake
suddenly or be involved in a crash.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144
Interior equipment
Trunk lighting
On the underside of the parcel shelf is a light
that is switched on and off when the trunk is
opened and closed.
If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be
switched off automatically after 20 minutes
to prevent the battery from running flat.
Emergency opening of the
narrow backrest
The narrow section of the backrest can be
opened in anemergency if the car is without
electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)
and you need to access the trunk for a warn-
ing triangle, for example.
• Removethecoveranddepresstheyellow
lever forward.
Tools and spare wheel, see page 246.
Cover over emergency opening lever, on
parcel shelf
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 145
Starting and driving
Ignition switch ________
Steering wheel lock____
Starting the engine ____
146
148
148
Economical driving_____ 179
Driving in cold weather__ 181
Driving in hot climates __ 183
Towing a trailer ________ 184
Important considerations
for driving __________
150
153
157
158
159
165
166
Driving with a roof rack
load ________________ 188
Refueling ____________
Engine Break-in Period_
Manual transmission___
Automatic transmission
Cruise control ________
Braking______________
Driving with a load _____ 189
Driving with the trunk lid
open________________ 189
Driving in deep water ___ 189
Driving at night ________ 190
Towing the car_________ 190
Traction Control System
(TCS) ______________
169
Driving with the compact
spare tire____________ 193
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) ______
171
173
173
Jump starting _________ 193
For long trips__________ 196
Parking brake_________
Parking______________
Saab Parking Assistance 176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146
Starting and driving
Ignition switch
WARNING
The ignition switch is located on the center
console between the front seats. In cars
with automatic transmission, the remote
control can only be removed when the
selector lever is in position P.
• Always remove the remote control
before leaving children unattended in
the car.
• Apply the parking brake before remov-
ing the remote control.
NOTICE
• Never remove the remote control
while the car is moving. This will acti-
vate thesteeringwheel lockandmake
it impossible to steer the car.
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or
liquid gets into it, the switch may not
operate properly.
If snow from clothing falls into the ignition
switch and melts, the ignition switch can
seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing
before getting into the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 147
To allow the various systems in the car time
to register that the remote control has been
inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn
the remote control for roughly half a second.
LOCK position
Theparkinglights,hazardwarninglightsandinteriorlightingcanbeturned
on.
Cars with automatic transmission: Move the gear lever to P.
The gear lever is locked in position. This is the only position in which the
remote control can be removed.
Cars with manual transmission: The remote control can be removed
regardless of the position of the gear lever.
OFF position
Parts of the electrical system are operative.
not running as this could cause the battery to run flat in a matter of
hours.
Cars with automatic transmission: The gear lever is not locked. See
also page 160.
ON position
The entire electrical system is operative.
Do not leave the remote control in the ON position when the engine
is not running.
Turn the remote control to the OFF position to disconnect the electrical
system.
WhenyouturntheremotecontroltoON, someindicatorandwarninglights
willcomeon in the maininstrument panel. Theseshould goout after about
3 seconds.
ST - starter position
The starter motor operates (automatic transmission: selector lever must
be in P or N) when the remote control is turned to this position. When
released, the remote control will spring back to the ON position.
Thecar has anelectronic restart lock. Iftheenginefails tostart, theremote
control must first be turned back to a position between OFF and LOCK
before the starter motor can be operated again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148
Starting and driving
If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel
lock, the following message will be
displayed on the SID:
Steering wheel lock
Starting the engine
The steering wheel lock is electronic. The
lock engages when the remote control is
removedfromtheignitionandunlockswhen
the remote controlisinserted. A clickcanbe
heard when the steering wheel lock locks
and unlocks.
WARNING
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
Ifthesteeringwheellockmalfunctionswhile
the remote control is in the ignition switch,
this may prevent the removal of the remote
control or prevent the car from being
restarted once the engine has been
switched off.
If you have to leave the car, lock the car by
pressing down the lock buttons on the
doors. Lock the front left door from outside
with the traditional key (see page 44). The
car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If
the gear lever is not in the neutral posi-
tion, the clutch pedal must be fully
depressed or the car will jump
forwards or backwards, which may
cause a crash.
- Never start the car from outside the
vehicle, e.g. through a window that is
down. This could lead to serious
personal injury.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do
not succeed on first attempt you must
remove the remote control before trying
again. Turn the steering wheel and insert
the remote control into the ignition switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not disen-
gageitwillnotbepossibletoturntheremote
control in the ignition switch.
• Cars with automatic transmission:
selectpositionPtoremovetheignition
key. The key can only be removed in
this gear position.
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
Steering wheel locked.
Pull out key, turn steering
wheel. Try again.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to
the danger of CO – always open the
garage doors before starting the
engine in the garage.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when
parked with the engine running. There
is a risk of depressing the accelerator
which could lead to engine damage.
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 149
Cars with automatic transmission
The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
Starting the engine
Useful tips on starting the engine
If the engine has failed to start after several
attempts in very cold weather, proceed as
follows:
Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily
before it has warmed up. Do not drive away
before the warning and indicator lights have
gone out.
The engine has an automatic choke and
should be started as follows:
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N
position.
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.
Note! Once the engine has started, the
brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly
normal.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is
essential that you turn the ignition to
ON before depressing the accelerator).
2 Presstheacceleratortothefloorandrun
the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This
will prevent the engine being flooded
(fully depressed accelerator cuts off the
fuel supply).
Cars with manual transmission
Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must
be fully depressed.
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3 Now start the engine in the normal way
- do not touch the accelerator.
Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),
donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting
the engine.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not
touch the accelerator.
3 Start the engine. Let the remote control
spring back as soon as the engine has
started and is running smoothly.
Allow the engine to idle for about
10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at
least 3 minutes after starting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150
Starting and driving
2 Stopping the engine
Important
NOTICE
• Do not rev the engine immediately
before switching it off - stop the engine
when it is idling.
considerations for
driving
• If the engine sounds strange there is a
malfunction. Contact a Saab dealer
immediately.
3 Regulating the boost pressure
1 Starting and driving
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
• One of the advantages of boost pres-
sure regulation is that the engine can
also be run safely on gasoline with a
lower octane rating, although not lower
than AON 87. However, engine perfor-
mance will fall slightly and heavy load-
ingandlaboringshouldbeavoided. For
optimum performance, use the recom-
mended grade of fuel.
• Do not use full throttle until the engine
is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary
wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge
repeatedly enters the red zone, the
engine may suddenly lose power, due
to the initiation of a monitoring system
that limits the boost pressure. Contact
a Saab dealer as soon as possible.
• Under certain barometric conditions
(high outside temperature and/or high
altitude) the needle may enter the first
part of the red zone without necessarily
indicating that a fault has arisen.
Limp-home
The engine management system has a
diagnostic feature that checks a number of
internal functions. If a fault is detected in the
throttle valve, the engine management
system will set the throttle system to the
limp-home mode. This means:
• The maximum boost pressure is regu-
lated according to the tendency of the
engine to knock. Short-lived knocking
is perfectly normal. This can occur
when the engine is running at about
3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The
extent of this knocking will depend on
the grade of fuel in the tank.
• idling control will be poor (uneven idling
since regulated by ignition and fuel
supply)
• engine performance will be reduced
• the cruise control will not function
• Aprotectivefunction(interruptionofthe
fuel supply) limits the engine speed.
• thecapacityoftheA/Ccompressor willbe
limited.
• Isolated instances of knocking can
occur with low-octane fuel. This
controlled form of knocking, followed
by a reduction in the boost pressure, is
a sign that the control system is work-
ing normally, and is perfectly safe for
the engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 151
Ifthediagnosisfunctiondetectsafaultinthe
engine management system, the light
"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in
the instrument panel will come on (see
page 79). Have the car checked at a Saab
dealer as soon as possible.
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program.
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the
engine (not running on all cylinders) and
any loss of power or performance. At the
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed
and take the car to a Saab dealer.
Important considerations with
catalytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust
system. It consists of a metal canister with a
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have
walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious
metal alloy).
• If the engine fails to start (in severe cold
or if the battery is flat), the car can be
bump started (manual transmission only)
or started using jump leads to a donor
battery. However, as soon as you have
started the engine, it is important that it
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow
it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this
time, the engine still fails to run properly,
switch off the engine to avoid serious
damage to the catalytic converter.
NOTICE
NOTICE
If
"Engine malfunction (CHECK
ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash
(indicating that the engine is misfiring and
the catalytic converter can be damaged),
ease off the accelerator slightly. The light
If the light continues to flash despite
easing off the accelerator, you may
continue to drive the car but at the mini-
mum throttle permitted by the current traf-
fic situation. Have the car checked as
soon as possible at a Saab dealer.
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded
gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair
the function of the catalytic converter.
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid
damage to the converter and its associated
components, the following points must be
observed:
Contact a Saab dealer for advice.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152
Starting and driving
• Never park the car on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot and could there-
fore start a fire.
NOTICE
Ifthecarrunsoutofgas,airmaybedrawn
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause
the catalytic converter to be damaged by
overheating.
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.
• If you bump start the car when the engine
isalreadyatnormalworkingtemperature,
the engine must start to run on all cylin-
ders. Abort bump starting if the engine
fails to start immediately.
WARNING
Failure to strictly follow these instructions
can result in damage to the catalytic con-
verter and associated components, and
could represent a breach of the warranty
conditions.
If the engine is being run with the car on a
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure
adequate cooling, air must be blown into
the engine compartment and under the
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air
effect that would obtain at the corre-
sponding road speed.
Engine management system with catalytic
converter
1 Engine control module
2 Oxygen sensor
3 Catalytic converter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 153
Refueling
NOTICE
NOTICE
WARNING
• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come
right up the filler pipe as room for
expansion is needed for when the
temperature rises.
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores
fault codes.
Ifyouspillfuelandthensomethingignites
it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. This spray can happen if your
tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot
weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Under certain circumstances, this may
cause constant illumination of the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp
• The use of fuel with too low an octane
rating can cause serious engine
damage.
, thus indicating a fault that must be
checked by your Saab dealer, see
page 79.
• Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible.
Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.
Therefore:
NOTE: always observe the following two
measures:
• never smoke while refueling
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is
screwed on correctly before the
engine is started. Screw on the fuel
filler cap until you hear a distinct click.
• never use gasoline for any purpose
other than as engine fuel
• gasoline is extremely flammable and
can cause severe burns. No open or
exposed flames near gasoline
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level
indicator illuminated. The symbol illu-
minateswhenlessthanapproximately
2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains
in the tank.
• do not use a mobile phone at the
same time as refueling
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154
Starting and driving
Refueling
NOTICE
WARNING
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right
up the filler pipe as expansion room is
needed when the temperature rises.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
notremovethenozzle. Shutoff theflow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-
ing the station attendant. Leave the area
immediately.
• Fill to maximum filling capacity.
• Stop filling after the first time that the
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.
• Filling capacity can differ between
different fuel stations and outside
temperature. Fuel tank volume when
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
1 Switch off the engine.
2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-
hand rear fender.
Filler cap
3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the
flange on the filler pipe and let the first
mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-
coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw
the nozzle while filling is in progress.
4 Cease refueling the first time the pump
stops, and wait a few seconds after
you´ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle.
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed
room for expansion especially during
hot weather.
Filler cap
To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a
spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,
it will spring back to the right.
When you put the filler cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear three
clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid
possible running problems) is to keep the
tank full.
Manually opening the fuel filler door, Con-
vertible, see page 74.
Refer to page 181 for information regarding
gasoline anti-freeze.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 155
Filling a portable fuel container
WARNING
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
• 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
• 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane
is less than 87, you may get a heavy knock-
ing noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. A little pinging noise
when you accelerate or drive uphill is con-
sidered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel
is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or
higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-
ing, your engine needs service.
When refueling, hang the filler cap inside
the fuel door
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed or on any surface other than the
ground.
The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder
slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white
ring on the cap into the slot.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
togettherighttype. Yourdealercangetone
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operat-
ing the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gaso-
line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156
Starting and driving
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
It is recommended that gasoline meet spec-
ifications which were developed by automo-
bile manufacturers around the world and
contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter
which is available from the Alliance of Auto-
mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli-
ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet-
ing these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control
system performance compared to other
gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California speci-
fications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on
fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
smog-check test. See Engine malfunction
(CHECK ENGINE) on page 79. If this
occurs, return to your authorized Saab
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your
warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
your emission control system to work prop-
erly. You should not have to add anything to
yourfuel.However, somegasolinescontain
only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-
mends that you buy gasolines that are
advertised to help keep fuel injectors and
intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-
ences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-
lines may be available in your area to con-
tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they
comply with the specifications described
earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed
for fuel that contains methanol. Do not
use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-
rode metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be cov-
ered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask
the attendant where you buy gasoline
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 157
whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does
not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Wearing in new brake pads
Engine Break-in Period
New brake pads take time to bed in, about
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely
under stop-and-go conditions or about
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid
hard braking as much as possible.
Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need
time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant
surfaces.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system may be affected.
Themalfunctionindicator lampmayturnon.
Ifthisoccurs,returntoyourauthorizedSaab
dealer for service.
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
do not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full
throttle, other than for brief instances,
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).
If you plan on driving in another country out-
side the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom-
mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you will
be driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158
Starting and driving
Manual transmission
Clutch interlock
To start the car, the clutch pedal must be
depressed.
When changing gear, fully depress the
clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It
isinadvisabletodrivewithyourhandresting
on the gear lever, as this can increase the
wear on the gearbox.
Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you
must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.
Gear positions, 5-speed
Gear positions, 6-speed
NOTICE
When reverse gear is to be engaged,
the car must be at a standstill with
the accelerator fully released.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 159
Automatic transmission
WARNING
• Depressthebrakepedalwhenshifting
the selector lever from P or N.
Indication of gear position on main
instrument panel
• The car must be at a standstill before
P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave
your foot on the brake pedal to move
the lever out of P. If the car is still
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause a
crash or damage the automatic trans-
mission.
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in the P or N position.
When the car is stationary, the engine must
be idling when you move the selector lever
from one position to another. If not, the
transmission could be damaged.
Selector lever
1 Position for manual gear selection
• Never park the car with the selector
lever in a drive position, even if the
parking brake is on.
The remote control can only be removed
when the selector lever is in the P position.
NOTICE
• If you want to leave the car with the
engine running, move the selector
lever to P or N and apply the parking
brake.
After selecting a drive position, pause
brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar
starts to pull a little) before you acceler-
ate.
The automatic transmission has an elec-
tronic control module. The control module
receives information including accelerator
position and road speed. Using this and
other information, it controls the hydraulic
pressure of the transmission to ensure that
gear changing is as smooth as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160
Starting and driving
Adaptive gear change patterns
Thermal transmission protection
The adaptive gear change pattern function
adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv-
ing conditions. The transmission control
module senses the engine load, vehicle
speed and temperature of the transmission.
A suitable gear change pattern is then
selected automatically to avoid unneces-
sarygearchangesandundesiredincreases
in transmission temperature.
Certain variants use a special change pat-
ternforthefirstfew minutesafteracoldstart
so that the catalytic converter reaches its
working temperature more quickly.
The transmission has built-in protection
against overheating. This protection is pro-
vided by the controlmodule, whichchanges
gear change patterns.
1 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 257°F (125°C), the gear
change pattern is changed.
2 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 275°F (135°C), the gear
change pattern is again changed.
3 If the temperature of the transmission
fluid exceeds 302°F (150°C), engine
torque will be limited to 147 ft.lbs.
(200 Nm).
Selector lever detent
Park Brake Shift Lock
Gearbox too hot.
The transmission has a security function
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move
the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-
tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch)
must be pressed in at the same time as the
brake pedal is held depressed.
The detent button on the selector lever has
to be pressed in before the lever can be
moved between certain positions.
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock, see page 162.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 161
Lock-up
Driving in hilly country with a
heavy load
Towing
The transmission’s torque converter has a
lock-up function. This can lock the torque
converter, thus reducing the engine speed
and fuel consumption.
Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,
see page 190.
The transmission fluid can overheat when
the gearbox is strained, for example, when
driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid
the transmission fluid overheating, always
drive with the selector lever in the D posi-
tion. The adaptivegear change patterns are
then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler
can also cause the transmission fluid to
overheat. Overheating reduces the service
life of the fluid.
Descending hills
If the speed of the car increases while
descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-
ator being released, the control module will
change down. If you desire more powerful
engine braking, manually select a lower
gear (see page 164).
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down fully,
a down change is made to optimize acceler-
ation, e.g. for overtaking.
Following this, the next higher gear will be
selected at the optimum engine speed,
unless you ease off the accelerator before
reaching this.
WARNING
Remembertousethebrakingeffectofthe
engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you
are descending long or steep hills to
spare the brakes.
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162
Starting and driving
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
Limp-home
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is
engaged.
Due to electrical problems it may not be
possible to move the selector lever out of
the park position, even if the ignition is
ON. If for some reason the selector lever
has to be moved out of the park position
(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as
described below.
If the transmission malfunctions, the control
module will activate limp-home mode. Driv-
ability will be affected to varying degrees.
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Contact Saab dealer.
1 Apply the parking brake.
Temporary override of Park Brake Shift
Lock
2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage
compartment ahead of the selector
lever.
3 Under the floor of the storage compart-
ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin
tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and
hold the plastic lever while moving the
selector lever from P to N.
In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are
available. Select 2nd gear when driving at
low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.
2nd gearmustbeselectedmanually. Select
5th gear manually or move the selector
lever to D (see page 164).
4 Remove the tool.
5 Release the parking brake if the car is to
be moved immediately, otherwise it
should remain on.
Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.
If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.
Contact a Saab dealer to have the problem
checked and rectified.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 163
Selector lever positions
N
You must press the brake pedal to move
the selector lever from the neutral position (N).
Inneutral,thetransmissionisdisengagedfromthe
engine. The engine can be started but make sure
the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected
movement.
P
The selector lever is locked and the transmission
is mechanically blocked.
The engine can be started.
To move the selector lever out of the P position,
depress the brake pedal and press in the detent
(catch) on the selector lever.
Only select the park position (P) when the car is
stationary.
To prevent the engine and transmission becoming
hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with
theengine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.
At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive
position (D).
R
Only select the reverse position (R) when the car
stationary. The detent release button must be
pressed before the selector lever can be moved
to R.
Wait until reverse gear has engaged before
touching the accelerator.
D
Thedriveposition(D) isthenormaloneforforward
driving. The transmission shifts automatically
between all gears from 1st to 5th, the timing of
which depends on factors such as the current
accelerator position and the speed of the car.
Pause for a moment before applying the acce-
lerator, to allow the gears to engage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164
Starting and driving
Sentronic, manual gear selection
Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)
(to the left position D) to select gear manually.
Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever
forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The
selector lever will return to a position adjacent to
the letter M after each gear change.
An example of when you may wish to make
manual gear changes is when overtaking, to
enableyou toremainina low gear foran extended
period of time.
Iftheroadsurfaceisslippery,youmaywishtostart
off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.
Steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection (optional on certain variants)
When descending steep hills you should select a
low gear to increase the braking effect of the
engine and thus spare the brakes.
Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument
panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.
When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D
position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-
erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.
When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the
transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low
enough to avoid overrevving.
Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear
selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually
using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-
ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M
position.
Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower
gear by pressing the left-hand button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 165
To set the desired speed
1 Slide the switch to ON.
Cruise control
(Cruise control system)
2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or
SET/– when the car has reached the
desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/
h)).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control system in
wetor icy conditions, indense trafficoron
winding roads.
To increase the preset speed
You can increase the speed in any of
the following ways:
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion), the brakes must be applied once
when the engine has started, before the
cruise control system can be activated.
• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise
control already engaged).
Cruise control switches
The followingmessage is shown on the SID:
The system has the following functions:
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/+positionuntil
the desired speed is reached (when
cruise control already engaged).
Tap brakes lightly before
using cruise control.
1 ON: engaged
2 OFF: disengaged
3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases
the set speed
4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases
the set speed
5 RESUME:re-engagesthesystematthe
set speed
The CRUISE indicator light in the main
instrument panel comes onwhentheswitch
is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine
while the cruise control is ON, the system
will be ON the next time the engine is
started.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166
Starting and driving
To reduce the preset speed
You can reduce speed in any of the follow-
ing ways:
To re-engage the system
return to the previously set speed. Vehicle
speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).
Braking
It is good practice to try your brakes period-
ically while driving. This is particularly
important when driving in heavy rain, on
roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or
in salty slush. In such conditions a slight
delay in the braking effect may be noticed.
To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly now and again. This
should also be done after the car has been
washed, and in extremely damp weather.
• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the
control to SET/+ or SET/–.
• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• HoldthecontrolintheSET/–positionuntil
the desired speed is reached.
To disengage the system
The system will be disengaged:
• As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is
depressed (cars with manual transmis-
sion).
• When the switch is slid towards OFF. See
also heading "To disengage the system
temporarily".
• When the switch is slid to OFF.
• When the TCS/ESP system is operative.
• When position N is selected (cars with
automatic transmission).
Temporary increase in speed
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,
such as when negotiating long descents
with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-
dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the
braking effect of the engine. If the car has
automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd
gear.
Youcanhelptoprolongthelifeofthebrakes
by thinking ahead and braking harder over
short periods, rather than braking more
moderately over long stretches.
Accelerate, without shifting down (manual
transmission),toexceedthesetspeedsuch
as for overtaking. When you release the
accelerator, the car will return to the set
speed.
To disengage the system
temporarily
Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but
only as far as to disengage the cruise con-
trol. Allow the switch to spring back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 167
The brake system provides Electronic
Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-
butes the brake pressure between the front
andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve
optimum braking performance irrespective
of the car’s speed or load.
The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function
which will switch on the ABS warning light
if a fault is detected in the system (see
page 78).
ABS brakes
WARNING
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from
timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin
heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon
the road, in snow, on a wet road
surface or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, thebrakes may take longer than
normal to take effect. To rectify this,
touch the brake pedal periodically to
dry the brakes out.
• The additional safety afforded by the
ABS system is not designed to allow
drivers to drive faster but to make
normal driving safer.
• Tostop asquickly as possible, without
loss of directional stability, whether
theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,
press the brake pedal down hard
without letting up (do not pump the
pedal), declutching simulta-
The following message will appear on the
SID (and corresponding symbol on main
instrument unit) if a fault is detected:
• The same applies after the car has
been washed or when the weather is
very humid.
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
neously, and steer the car to safety.
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that
thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand
dry.
The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-
lates the brake pressureto each wheel. The
pressure is automatically reduced just
before the wheel locks up and then
increases again to the point at which the
wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-
sors send information to the brake system’s
electronic control module for every 4 or so
inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This
information is processed continuously to
ensure that the adjustment of the brake
pressure will be as exact as possible.
Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per
second.
• The brakes are power assisted and it
should be kept in mind that the servo
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running.
• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe
engine is off, (e.g. when the car is
being towed) is roughly four times the
normal pedal force required. The
pedal also feels hard and unrespon-
sive.
• Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
Starting and driving
The ABS system will not reduce the braking
distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,
because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-
ing control is retained.
WhentheABSsystemoperatesyouwillfeel
the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking
noise, both of which are perfectly normal.
Apply the brake pedal with full force (you
cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-
essary steer to safety.
Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe
car has come to a halt or the danger is
past!
The above is critical.
Braking with ABS brakes.
Braking with ABS – evasive steering
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will
operate even when only light pressure is
applied to the brake pedal. This means that
the driver can brake gently to test the condi-
tion of the road and adapt their driving
accordingly.
Indication that the system is operating:
pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise
It is well worth practising the use of ABS
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 169
If the two front wheels are rotating at the
same speed but are turning faster than the
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is
reduced to eliminate the difference.
The process continues until all the wheels
are rotating at the same speed.
The advantages of the TCS become most
apparent when the cohesion between the
front wheels and the road surface is so low
that one or both of the wheels would lose
their grip were the car not equipped with the
TCS, e.g.:
TCS OFF
Traction Control
System (TCS)
Anti-spin system
lights up under the speedometer if:
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• there is a fault in the ABS system
• the system has been switched off
manually.
WARNING
When driving normally, the TCS system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The TCS must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different
surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),
the TCS functions like an electronic differ-
ential lock, making sure that both wheels
rotate at the same speed.
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery surface, in which case
the system eliminates wheelspin. The
system also functions when the car is
reversing.
How the system works
The Traction Control System (TCS) is
designed to prevent wheelspin. This
enables the car to achieve the best possible
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,
together with greater stability.
The TCS uses information from the ABS
wheelsensorsto detectwhenthefront (driv-
ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear
wheels.Itthenmonitorswhetheronedriving
wheel is rotating faster than the other. If so,
the faster wheel is retarded until both
• When cornering, if the inside front wheel
rotates faster than the other wheels.
wheels are rotating at the same speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170
Starting and driving
Turning the TCS off
The TCS is switched on automatically when
the engine is started.
Youcanswitchthesystemoff manuallywith
the TCS button, whereupon the
light
under the speedometer will come on. The
TCS cannot be switched off if the car is trav-
elling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).
It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem
if the car has become bogged down, for
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.
If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will
be switched off automatically.
Thefollowingmessageis shownontheSID:
TCS button
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
TCS indicator
WhentheremotecontrolisturnedtotheON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the TCS is
operative.
The
light under the speedometer
comes on whenthe TCS is operative, that is
when one of the wheels has lost its grip.
The fact that the TCS is operative indicates
thatthelimitforgriphasbeenexceededand
that the driver must exercise greater care.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 171
How the ESP system works
Electronic Stability
Program (ESP)
TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto
prevent the car from skidding by braking
one or several wheels independently of the
driver. The engine output is then also
reduced to prevent the driving wheels from
spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure
wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,
steering wheel position and braking pres-
sure. The values provided by these sensors
are used to calculate the actual direction of
the car, the intentions of the driver and
whether the ESP should be engaged.
Anti-skid system
(Certain variants)
WARNING
When driving normally, the ESP system
helps to improve the car’s directional
stability. The ESP must not be regarded
as a system to enable the driver to main-
tain higher speeds. The same precau-
tions must be adopted as normal for safe
cornering and driving on slippery roads
must be adopted.
If this direction does not agree with that
intended by the driver, calculated from the
steering wheel position, the ESP is
engaged.
The ESP improves the driver’s chances
of retaining control over the car in critical
situations.
Illustration of how the system applies the
brakes on one or several wheels to help
avoid a skid
The Electronic Stability Program employs
both the antilock braking system (ABS) and
the traction control system (TCS). It is a
system that helps the driver to stabilize the
car in unusual circumstances that can oth-
erwise be difficult to handle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172
Starting and driving
If a fault is detected in the system, the
following message will be displayed on
the SID:
ESP indicator light
When theremotecontrolis turnedtotheON
position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds
while the system performs self-diagnosis.
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
The
light under the speedometer
comesonfor ashortperiodoftimewhenthe
ESP system is operative.
The cruise control system (if active) will
automatically be disengaged if the ESP is
operative.
Operation of the ESP indicates reduced
cohesion between the tires and the road,
and that extra care should be taken by the
driver.
NOTICE
Turning ESP system off
ESP button
Changes to the chassis, such as a
change of wheels, shock absorbers or
springs, could affect the function of the
ESP system.
The system can be turned off manually with
the ESP button, whereupon the
light
under the speedometer will come on. The
car must be travelling slower than 35 mph
(60 km/h). The TCS is also disengaged.
ESP OFF
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changing any chassis components.
lights up under the speedometer if:
TheESP is alwaysengaged during braking,
even if it has been switched off manually
with the ESP button.
• a fault has been detected and the system
has therefore been switched off
• the system has been switched off
manually
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 173
Parking brake
Parking
WARNING
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when
you park the car. If the car is to be
left parked for a long time, refer to
page 175.
• Never leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny
weather, the temperature inside the
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).
• Alwaysapplytheparkingbrakebefore
removing the remote control.
• Park where the vehicle will not create
an obstruction or a hazard to other
road users.
• Do not use the parking brake while
driving.
• Do not park on dry grass or other
combustible material. The catalytic
converter gets very hot andcouldstart
a fire.
Correct hold
• Grasp the parking brake lever in such
awaythatnofingersgettrappedwhen
you release the parking brake.
If the parking brake is applied when the car
starts off, the following message will appear
on the SID:
• Apply the parking brake, remove the
remote control and lock the car.
The parking brake lever is situated between
the front seats. The brake acts on the rear
wheels. When the parking brake is applied,
Release parking brake.
the
indicator light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on.
To release the parking brake, lift the lever
slightly, pullthe releasebuttononthe under-
side of the lever and lower the lever.
If conditions allow, it is best if the brake
pedal is not depressed, or only depressed
as little as necessary so as to stop the car
from rolling, when the parking brake is
applied.
To facilitate releasing the parking brake,
depress the brake pedal. This is especially
appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174
Starting and driving
NOTICE
Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:
• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,
computer or similar object visible in
the car.
• Clothing, packages and bags attract
thieves.
• Do not leave small objects such as
CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.
• If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-
ous parking space.
1 Downhill with curb.
Turn the wheels toward
thecurbandedgethecar
forwards until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
2 Uphill with curb. Turn
thewheelsawayfromthe
curb and edge the car
backward until the wheel
lightly touches the curb.
3 Uphill or downhill with-
out curb. Turn the wheel
towards the edge of the
road so that the car,
should it move, will not
roll towards the middle of
the road.
• Thieves strike whenever and wher-
ever they are given the opportunity.
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front
wheels so that they will be blocked by the
curb if the car should move.
If the car is parked with one front wheel
touching the curb, for example, you may
need to turn the steering wheel slightly
when you insert the remote control to allow
the steering wheel lock to unlock.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 175
• Park the car in a dry, covered and well-
ventilated building. Leave the parking
brake OFF!
• Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft
top should be closed.
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some
time, e.g. three tofour months, the following
steps are recommended:
• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and
hoses.
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber
seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,
and lubricate them with glycerol
(glycerine).
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs
to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on
the road and applying the brakes a few
times.
• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation
forming in it.
• If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave
the parking brake off.
• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.
If frost is likely to occur during the storage
period, remove the battery and store it in
a frost-free place.
• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle
stands, increase the tire pressure to
43 psi (3 bar).
Leave all the door windows open a crack
and cover the car with a non-plastic
tarpaulin–notonemadeofplasticwhichwill
not breath.
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176
Starting and driving
Saab Parking
Assistance
Saab Parking Assistance
(option)
WARNING
Responsibility always lies with the driver
when reversing.
• The parking assistance system can
facilitate parking and reversing.
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
the side
Area monitored by the sensors seen from
above
• Bear in mind that small objects, such
as a child lying on the ground, and
narrow objects cannot always be
detected by the system.
The system uses four sensors in the rear
bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that
bounce back to the sensors off any objects
behind the car. The system, however,
cannot always detect small or narrow
objects, such as a post, since the surface
area presented to the car is too small.
The system is activated automatically when
reverse is engaged or selected. Audible
confirmation is given and the following text
is shown on the SID:
Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking
and reversing. There are four sensors in the
rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft
(1.8 meters) behind the car.
If the car is heavily laden, the system may
falsely indicate that there is an object within
the detection range. This is since the sen-
sors are angled towards the ground when
the car is tail-heavy.
Parking assistance active
If a warning message, such as the seatbelt
reminder,isshownontheSIDwhenreverse
is engaged, the audible signals from the
parking assistance system will not be heard
since the warning message has priority.
When the sensors detect an object within
the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)
will be heard. Thefrequency of these pulses
increases as the car comes closer to the
object.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 177
If you stop the car with reverse gear
engaged, the sound pulse will stop after
2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if
you continue to reverse. If the car rolls for-
ward while reverse is engaged, the system
is silenced.
When the distance to the object is less
than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will
be heard.
When an object is approximately 3 ft.
(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses
change character markedly (frequency
increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)
is suitable if you wish to load or unload the
trunk.
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
3 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
Cars with trailer hitch
If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is
correctly connected to the car’s electrical
system, the Saab Parking Assistance auto-
matically compensates for the protrusion of
the tow bar.
If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the
trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to
the car’s electrics, the system is automati-
cally deactivated.
NOTICE
The sensors must be kept clean to func-
tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect
their sensitivity.
Large quantities of snow or dirt covering
the sensors can prevent the parking
assistance system from detecting any
objects.
You can temporarily deactivate the Saab
Parking Assistance as follows:
Do not spray the sensors with a pressure
washer, as this can damage them.
• Engage reverse and press the CLEAR
button on the SID control panel.
The system will be reactivated the next time
you engage reverse.
Reversing alongside a wall
If the distance between an object and a
corner sensor does not change for
2 seconds, for example if you are reversing
alongside a wall, the system will switch to
monitoring straight back. The system indi-
cates if the distance to the wall decreases
again.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-
nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,
the system is automatically deactivated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178
Starting and driving
Error messages
If the system malfunctions, the following
message will appear on the SID:
The system can be switched off using
Profiler.
Explanation of SPA on and SPA off.
SPA on
1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to
Profiler.
2 Select Park Assistance using the
INFO dial.
Saab Parking Assistance is activated
automatically when reverse is
engaged. The system warns of objects
behind the car.
Parking assistance
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
3 Press in the INFO dial.
If a trailer is hitched up and correctly
connected to the trailer connector, the
system will be deactivated automati-
cally. You can also deactivate the sys-
temtemporarilywiththe CLEAR button
if reverse has been engaged and the
system is active.
If the system is subject to interference, the
following message will be shown on the
SID:
4 Select SPA on or SPA off.
5 Confirm this selection by pressing the
INFO dial.
Parking assistance sensor
interference.
Park Assistance
SPA on
SPA off
SPA off
If this message appears, clean the sensors.
The sensors are located in the black trim on
the rear bumper
Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 179
How to read the diagram:
Economical driving
If fuel consumption with the engine at
normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/
100 km), the actual fuel consumption
3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started
from cold will be:
– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).
Factors affecting fuel
consumption
The fuel consumption of a car is greatly
affected by driving conditions, climate, road
conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.
– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
– 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.
of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
It is clear from the diagram that both dis-
tance driven and outside temperature have
a significant impact on fuel consumption,
after a cold start.
If the car is normally driven on short jour-
neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to
and from work, the average consumption
will be 60–80% above the normal level.
Breaking-in
Fuel consumption may be somewhat
higher during the break-in period (the
first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).
Weather conditions
Percentage increase in fuel consumption
of engine starting from cold compared to
engine at normal temperature.
Summer temperatures give better fuel
economy than winter ones. The difference
can be as much as about 10%. Consump-
tion increases in cold weather because the
engine takes longer to reach its normal
operating temperature. The transmission
and wheel bearings also take longer to
warm up. Even distance affects consump-
tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)
do not give the engine enough time to
reach its optimum temperature. Wind con-
ditions also have a marked effect on fuel
consumption.
Driving techniques
• To obtain the best running economy, with
regard to fuel consumption and general
wear, the car must be serviced regularly.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,
frequent braking and much changing
down all give higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting
in cold weather, the use of studded tires
and roof racks, and towing a camper all
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not warm up the engine while the car
is stationary.
If idling, the engine will take much longer
to reach its optimum temperature, and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180
Starting and driving
engine wear is at its greatest during this
period. Drive off as soon as possible after
starting the engine and avoid high engine
speeds.
• Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as
possible. Match your driving to the
prevailing traffic conditions.
• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher
fuel consumption than driving in a high
gear because of the higher engine speed
for any given road speed. Always shift up
as soon as traffic conditions allow and
drive in the highest gear as much as
possible.
• Check the tire pressure once a month.
Incorrect tire pressure increases tire
wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure
to be slightly high than too low. Under-
pressure increases fuel consumption.
• Check the fuel consumption regularly.
Increased fuel consumption can indicate
that something is wrong and that the car
needs to be checked at a Saab dealer.
Practicalroadtestshavedemonstratedthat
substantial savings in fuel consumption can
be made if the above advice is followed.
Engine block heater
(standard equipment in Canada, acces-
sory in U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits
to the car and the environment of using an
engine block heater:
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced
over short runs.
The engine heater is effective at outside
temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).
Thewarmeritisoutside,theshorterthetime
the engine heater needs to be connected.
Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while driving
as the effect of the brakes and power
steering will be greatly reduced.
Road conditions
Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is
less than the additional amount required to
climb the hill).
If the car is equipped with a removable,
electric cabin heater that is not in use, store
this in the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 181
Condensation is caused by temperature
fluctuations, either in the outside temper-
ature alone or when the car is alternately
parked outdoors and in a garage.
Driving in cold weather
In cold weather, special attention should be
paid to the following:
• Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top
• Before driving off, make sure that the
wiper blades have not frozen to the wind-
shield.
• Remove any snow from the heating
system air intakes between the hood and
the windshield.
• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to
prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-
denum-sulphide oil (MoS2). If the locks
freeze, exercise care when unlocking the
car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking
the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.
• It is particularly important when the roads
are slippery that the brakes and tires are
in good condition.
at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).
• The car is equipped with tires designed to
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry
roads, althoughthis has been achievedat
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow
and ice, we therefore recommend that
winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires
achieve this extra grip at the expense of
grip on bare road surfaces.
Winter tires, particularly studded tires, gen-
erally make driving safer on snow and ice.
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different
types of winter tires and snow chains.
Studded tires are not allowed in some
countries.If winter tiresarefitted, thesame
type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your
Saabdealerwillbepleasedtoadviseyouon
the best tires for your car.
• For how to check the level of antifreeze in
the engine coolant, see page 205.
• Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling
several times before the onset of winter.
This will prevent condensation water in
the fuel tank from freezing and causing
interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-
hood of condensation is lowest when the
fuel tank is full.
If the car is parked outside and the
temperature is below zero, gasoline anti-
freeze is of little use as it cannot remove
water that has already frozen. Park the
car in a warm place so that any ice that
may have built up melts, then add gaso-
line anti-freeze when refueling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
Starting and driving
be necessary to change winter tires before
they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad-
ually lose their friction properties with age.
Driving with tire chains
Snowchainsmustonlybefittedtothewheel
andtiredimensions thatSaabrecommends
in "Technical data" on page 267.
If you get into a front wheel skid and the car
has a manual transmission, the best
response is to freewheel, which means
declutching so that the wheels neither drive
nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the
desired direction.
Contact a Saab dealer regarding approved
tire chains. See also page 240.
WARNING
• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph
(50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease
off the accelerator slightly and steer cau-
tiously in the desired direction.
If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the
same direction as the movement of the rear
of the car.
• Tire chains can reduce directional
stability.
• Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear
wheels.
NOTICE
• Check the links frequently for wear.
• Check that the chains do not foul the
wheel arch liner at full lock.
• Refer to the "Technical data" section
on page 267, for information on wheel
and tire dimensions approved for the
fitting of tire chains.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 183
2 If the engine is idling and the needle on
the temperature gauge falls, wait until a
normal temperature is shown (about in
the middle of the scale) before switching
off the engine. If the coolant needs to be
topped up, carefully unscrew the
expansion tank cap.
Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %
antifreezeand50 %cleanwater.Usean
antifreeze approved by Saab.
Driving in hot climates
Always check the coolant level before start-
ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the
coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD
mark on the expansion tank (boundary
betweentheupperandlowersectionsofthe
tank).
At the end of a journey, allow the engine to
idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.
If the needle on the temperature gauge
enters the red zone, the following message
will be shown on the SID:
WARNING
• Exercise care when opening the hood
if the engine is overheated. Never
remove the expansion tank cap
Hot engine.
Make a safe stop.
Run engine on idle.
completely when the engine is hot.
1 Stop the car but do not switch off the
engine. Do not remove the cap on the
cooling system expansion tank, even if
the tank is empty. The engine tempera-
tureshoulddecrease. Ifthetemperature
continues to rise with the engine idling,
the engine must be switched off.
• The cooling system is pressurized -
hot coolant and vapour can escape.
These can cause injury to your eyes
and burns. Open the cap slowly to
release the pressure before removing
it.
3 Have the car’s cooling system checked
at a Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184
Starting and driving
Trailer hitch attachment
Towing a trailer
Trailer hitch attachments are available as
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),
with trailer brakes.
WARNING
• Do not drive with a trailer on inclines
steeper than 15 %. The load on the
drive (front) wheels will be so low that
the wheels can start to spin and
prevent further progress.
An electrical connection for the towbar and
an electrical unit are provided in the electri-
cal centre on the left-hand side of the lug-
gage compartment.
TheSaabgenuineelectricalsocketenables
a battery in the trailer on tow to be charged
while driving. Also, if the car has SPA, this
is deactivated automatically if a trailer is
hitched up and correctly connected to the
Saab genuine trailer socket.
• In addition, the car’s parking brake
may not always be sufficient to hold
the car and trailer securely, as the
wheels may start to slide.
• Always apply the trailer’s parking
brake when unhitching it. There is
otherwise a risk of personal injury or
damage to the bumper should the
trailer start to roll.
Saab recommendations:
• Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is
designed and tested for your Saab.
• Contact your Saab dealer for advice on
which trailer hitch is designed for your car.
• When you hitch up the trailer be sure
to attach its safety chains to the holes
by the hitch.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
requirements regarding speed limits for
towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer
braking requirements, and also any spe-
cial driving licence provisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 185
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).
The following message will be displayed on
the SID if the transmission fluid becomes
too hot:
NOTICE
• Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch,
since other models can damage the
car’s bodywork and electrical system.
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
• ConsultaSaabdealerforguidanceon
how to connect a trailer hitch.
6-8
2200 (1000) unlimited
1760 (800) max. 15
1100 (500) max. 15
880 (400) max. 15
If this message appears, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so and allow the
engine to idle until the message has gone
out. The selector lever should be in
position P.
When continuing your journey, manually
select a low gear in which the engine speed
is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases
(see page 164).
9-11
• Exercise carewhen drivingonuneven
roads or against the curb if the car is
heavilyladen. Thisparticularlyapplies
to cars with 17" wheels.
12-14
max. 15
When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-
ing important considerations in mind.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-
Recommendations for cars with
automatic transmission
The following driving time limits are based
on the capacity of the cooling system in hot
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).
WARNING
Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorderasthe
temperature of the transmission increases:
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the
brakes when you are driving on a long or
steep downhill slope.
Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,
• Gear change pattern is altered
• A/C compressor is switched off
• Max. engine torque is reduced
hill, %
weight, lbs. minutes
(kg)
6-8
3330 (1500) unlimited
3080 (1400) max. 15
2645 (1200) max. 15
2200 (1000) max. 15
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
9-11
12-14
max. 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186
Starting and driving
Recommendations for cars with
manual transmission
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated
by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-
ment panel.
When the needle is just outside the red
zone, the A/C compressor will be switched
off and, on certain engine variants, the max-
imum engine torque will be limited.
When continuing your journey, select a low
gear in which the engine speed is about
3,500 rpm until the incline eases.
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes
a lot of difference to the handling properties
of the car and trailer combination. With a
two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over
the wheels and keep it as low as possible.
Thetrailer should be loaded so that the load
on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).
Note that this load must be included in the
total load for the car. If this now exceeds the
specified load capacity, the load in the trunk
may have to be reduced by the correspond-
ing amount.
Distribution of load in trailer
WARNING
a Light
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes
when you are driving on a long or steep
downhill slope.
b Moderate
c Heavy
Overheating can cause the brakes to
fade!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 187
Checks before driving
Driving considerations
Reversing
Make sure that the car and trailer are in
good working order. This is essential since
towing a trailer increases the strain on the
car.
Always take extra care when towing a
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different
and its braking performance reduced. The
trailer’s braking system and suspension
also have a considerable effect on these
characteristics. See also "Driving with a
load" on page 189.
Get someone to help you keep an eye out
behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not
always provide sufficient rearward vision
when reversing.
• Check and if necessary adjust the tire
pressure of the car and trailer.
• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly
tightened.
Drive carefully:
• descending hills
• on uneven roads
• over railway crossings
• when meeting large vehicles
Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select
gear M1 when ascending or descending
steep hills.
• Make sure that the equipment joining the
car and trailer is properly secured and
adjusted.
• Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is
properlyconnectedandisnotsolongthat
it drags along the ground. Also, make
sure the cable is not too short and risks
breaking when turning a corner.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check the car and trailer brakes.
• Make sure that all items on or in the
camper or trailer are properly secured.
• Make sure that the trailer’s jockey wheel
is raised and locked.
• Check the distribution of the load so that
the car and trailer are well balanced.
• Check that the rearview mirrors provide
the best possible rearward vision.
• Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is
correctly attached.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188
Starting and driving
Driving with a roof rack
load
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Adjust your speed to the prevailing
conditions.
• Duetohigheraerodynamicsdrag, fuel
economymaysufferwhendrivingwith
a roof rack.
Mounting holes for roof carrier
5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly
mounted.
The maximum permissible roof load is
220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load
must be included in the car’s maximum per-
missible payload and axle load.
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for your car are available from your
Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads
securely.
1 Open the four covers on the roof of the
car.
2 Insertascrewwithwasherintoeachroof
carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.
3 The roof carriers are marked front and
back.
4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in
the roof.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 189
Driving with a load
Thehandlingcharacteristicsareaffectedby
how the car is loaded.
Drivingwiththetrunklid Driving in deep water
open
NOTICE
Do not drive in puddles or water deeper
than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster
than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be
suckedintotheengine. Theenginewillbe
seriously damaged if water enters the
intake system.
WARNING
NOTICE
Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or
fully open, since exhaust fumes can be
drawn into the cabin.
• Place the heaviest load as far forward
and as low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the lashing eyes
(see page 143).
If you must drive with the trunk lid open,
close all windows and the sunroof (if
equipped) and set the cabin fan to its high-
est speed setting.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s
center of gravity is further back. As a
result, the car will sway more during
evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load of
the roof box, even if there is room for
more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct
– slight overinflation is preferable to
underinflation.
• Thebrakingdistanceofaloadedcaris
always greater. Keep your distance
from the vehicle in front.
• Do not exceed the car’s permissible
gross vehicle weight or axle load (see
page 268).
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
For further information on tires see
page 234.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190
Starting and driving
Front towing eye
WARNING
Driving at night
Bear in mind the following points, especially
when driving at night:
Towing the car
WARNING
• Nighttime driving requires your full
concentration
• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking
slightly longer.
• The number of drivers under the influence
of drugs is likely to be greater at night than
during the day.
• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-
ing vehicles.
• Avoid driving at night if you have poor
eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with
age.
• Keep your car’s headlights, windows and
mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,
make sure they are clean.
• Make sure you are well rested before
starting a long journey. Take a break
every other hour.
• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a
tendency to induce tiredness.
• Make sure that the towing eye is
screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand
thread!
• Remember that the brake servo does
not operate when the engine is off.
Much greater pressure than normal
will therefore be required to operate
the brake pedal.
• The towing eye is only designed for
towing the car on roads. It must not
be used to pull the car out of a ditch,
for example.
• Nor does the steering servo operate
when the engine is off. The steering
will therefore be much heavier than
usual.
• Make sure that all bystanders keep a
suitable distance, in case the towing
eye or tow rope should snap. The
towing eye or tow rope could catapult
off and cause seriously injury.
• The towing vehicle should always be
heavier than the vehicle on tow.
• Never allow passengers to ride in the
car when it is on tow.
• Never drive with the towing eye fitted
to the front bumper. Return it to its
designated storage space.
• Always seek professional help if the
car needs to be recovered.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON
position if the car is moved with the
engine not running.
• Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and
dawn.
• The steering wheel lock must be
disengaged before towing the car.
• Check the headlight levelling setting (see
page 96).
• The steering wheel lock disengages
when the remote control is inserted
into the ignition switch, if the battery
has sufficient charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 191
Front towing eye fitted.
The towing eye has a left-hand thread!
Rear towing eye
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanent towing eye at the
rear under the bumper.
If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can
be used instead of the towing eye.
Towing the car
NOTICE
The front towing eye is stowed by the spare
wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper
is a cover concealing the attachment point
(tapped hole) for the towing eye.
Never use the towing eyes to pull the car
unstuck.
1 Press the knob on the upper section of
thiscover atthesame timeaspulling out
the lower edge.
2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing
Engage neutral (automatic transmission:
move the selector lever to N). Turn on the
parking lights.
Drive carefully and do not exceed the
speed limit for vehicles on tow.
eye has a left-hand thread!
3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to
tighten it properly.
To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top
edge of the cover. Then click in the lower
edge, one corner at a time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192
Starting and driving
Always try to keep the towrope taut by
gently applying the brake of the car on tow,
as necessary. This will avoid the towrope
being jerked violently.
Transporting the car
NOTICE
If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is
transported, for example on a flat bed
truck, take extra care not to damage the
spoiler and/or underbody.
Cars with automatic transmission:
NOTICE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front
wheels off the ground, make sure the
parking brake is off, as this acts on the
rear wheels.
Attachment points for anchorage straps
Always observe the speed limit for vehicles
on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car
must not be towed at speeds exceeding
30 mph (50 km/h) nor for adistance of more
than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be
transported over a longer distance, a tow
truck or flatbed truck must be called out.
The engine cannot be started by towing or
pushing the car. In an emergency, the
engine can be started as described under
"Jump starting" on page 193.
Vehicle recovery
If the car has to be transported on a flatbed
truck, or similar, it must be securely
strapped down. There are attachment
points for this purpose on the underside of
the car. The attachment points are oblong
hole that have been reinforced to cope with
the stresses that arise during this type of
transport.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 193
Important considerations when driving with
a compact spare tire:
Driving with the
Jump starting
compact spare tire
• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.
• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan
one compact spare tire at a time.
• Avoid driving against the curb.
• Do not use snow chains.
• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would
WARNING
WARNING
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery. Therefore, always
avoid sparks and open flames in the
vicinity of the battery.
• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The
tire can overheat affecting the car’s
roadholding.
• Tire pressure: refer to page 275.
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
• The spare tire or punctured tire must
be stowed under the trunk floor, and
secured in place with the retaining nut.
NOTICE
To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a
punctured tire, this can be temporarily
placed outside up in the spare wheel well
but only while driving to the closest work-
shop.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
theaffectedarealiberallywithwater. If
acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-
tity makes contact with the skin, seek
medical help.
Observe the following when the compact
spare tire is fitted:
• The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing a tire.
As a general rule, all heavy loads must be
well secured in the trunk (see page 143).
• Do not drive further than necessary with
the compact spare fitted - the maximum
life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles
(approx. 3,500 km).
• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
Starting and driving
NOTICE
NOTICE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be
covered by your warranty.
If the other system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if
you have a manual transmission. If you
have an automatic transmission, your
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling it.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumpercablescanreach, butbesurethe
vehicles are not touching each other. If
a poor connection on the negative
jumper cable should exist, it is possible
for damage to be caused to electrical
systems/components of either vehicle
should inadvertent contact be made.
You would not be able to start your car
and bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
Jump starting
It is essential when a donor battery is to be
used to jump start the car that the jump
leads be connected correctly to prevent
arcing.
NOTICE
To jump start your vehicle:
If you leave your radio on, it could be
badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe
covered by your warranty.
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P
(Park) or a manual transmission in
Neutral.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-
nals on the battery.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Turn off lights that are not needed, and
radios. This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries and it could save
your radio.
WARNING
Anelectric fancan startupeven when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom
any underhood electric fan.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting and driving 195
7 Do not let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to
the good battery’s negative terminal.
9 Attach the cable to the discharged
battery’s negative terminal.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
Using a battery charger/starter
unit
To avoid damaging the car’s electrical
system and electronics, the following rules
must be followed when charging the battery
or jump starting the car.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a
battery can cause battery gas to explode.
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
• If the charger or starter unit can be set to
differentvoltages(6V/12V/18V/24V),12V
must be selected.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
supplied with the charger or starter unit.
• No other apparatus that are grounded or
connected to the mains must be
connected to the car during charging or
jump starting.
• The charger or starter unit must under no
conditions produce a voltage greater
than:
Besuretheelectrolyteinthebattery isnot
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.
When connecting jumper cables to a
frozen battery, gas from the chemical
reaction inside the battery can build up
under the ice and cause an explosion.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the
discharged battery. If it does not start
after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,
flush the area with water and get medical
help immediately.
Note. If the current in the low battery is
too low it might be necessary to wait
several minutes with the cables
connected before you can start the
engine with the low battery.
• 16V continuous
• 18V for 60 min.
If you are unsure about the charge rating of
the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from
the positive terminal before connecting the
unit to the battery.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to
prevent electrical shorting. Take care
that they do not touch each other or any
other metal.
5 Check that the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock and also the
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and
negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do
not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a
short that could injure you or would
damage the battery and maybe other
parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196
Starting and driving
For long trips
Before starting off on a long journey, it is
advisable to have your car inspected by
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along
on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper
blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
the like.
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the
engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and
replace if it shows any signs of wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air
pressure, including the compact spare
tire.
• Take an extra remote control and keep it
separate.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and
jack in the car.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 197
Car care
Hood________________
Engine ______________
Engine bay ___________
Engine oil ____________
Air filter______________
Transmission fluid ____
Coolant______________
198
199
201
202
204
204
205
Fuses ________________ 227
Tires _________________ 234
Compact spare ________ 246
Changing a tire ________ 248
Safety belts ___________ 251
Upholstery and trim ____ 251
Textile carpeting _______ 252
Engine bay____________ 252
Washing______________ 252
Waxing and polishing___ 253
Touching up the paint___ 253
Anti-corrosion treatment 254
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads__________
206
207
208
210
211
211
213
Power steering________
Battery ______________
Drive belt ____________
Wipers and washers ___
Wiper blades _________
Changing bulbs _______
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials ____________ 256
Air conditioning (A/C)___ 257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198
Car care
Hood
The hood release handle is located on the
left under the instrument panel. Open the
hood in the following way:
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-
tion and is stopped by a safety catch at
the front edge.
3 Presstheleverofthecatchupwardsand
raise the hood.
When you close the hood you should drop it
from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),
without slamming it.
Hood release handle
Hood release catch plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 199
Engine families
Engine
Emission control
Saab cars imported into the United States
and Canada meet all applicable emission
control standards. The engine family and
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner
fender.
Theseenginefamiliesmeet applicableEPA
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand
are equipped with the following systems:
The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in-
line engine with twin overhead camshafts
and 16 valves.
systems
Thesystemsforcontrollingemissionstothe
atmosphere require regular checking and
adjustment at the intervals specified in the
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission
regulations and thereby helping to keep the
environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine
will also give maximum fuel economy.
The engine is equipped with two balance-
shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a
minimum.
The balance shafts are chain-driven and
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are
opposed to those generated by the pistons
and connecting rods. The effect occurs
twice in each revolution of the engine, coun-
teractingthe vibration fromitsmovingparts,
and at the same time reducing unwanted
engine noise.
• sequential multiport fuel injection system
• three way catalytic converter
• crankcase emissions control system
• evaporative emission system.
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth
The gearbox, located on the right (viewed
from the front), is integrated with the engine.
defects and reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200
Car care
Saab Trionic engine
management system
The Saab Trionic engine management
system is a unique Saab development that
combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
NOTICE
Allhydrocarbons formed whenrefueling will
be recovered by the car and not released
into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are
absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-
ter. When the engine is subsequently
started,theevaporativeemissioncanisteris
gradually purged as air is sucked into it
through a shut-off valve. The hydrocar-
bon/air mixture passes through the evap
canister purge valve and into the engine
where it is burned. “Refueling”, see
page 153.
The Trionic engine management system
continuously monitors the operation of
these systems and has on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in
the main instrument illuminates, the
TrionicECMhas detected aproblem. The
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should
have your car checked by a Saab dealer
as soon as possible.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM)
monitors many different engine parameters
such as:
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
When refueling, make sure you screw the
filler cap on and keep turning until it has
clicked 3 times.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position.
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent
engine performance while maintaining low
emissions and fuel consumption.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202
Car care
During the Break-in Period (approx.
3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving
at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil
consumption may be higher than normal.
Engine oil
Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level regularly.
1 Park the car on a level ground.
NOTICE
2 Switch off the engine and wait for
2–5 minutes. The engine should be at
normal operating temperature.
3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with
a clean rag before carrying out the
check.
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be
required more frequently if the car is
being used under certain conditions, see
page 263.
The level must not be below the MIN mark
on the dipstick, but nor should it be above
the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could
result in abnormal oil consumption.
Oil filler cap and dipstick
The distance between the MIN and MAX
marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).
Recommended oil grade, see page 270.
Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap
properly after topping up the oil to avoid run-
ning problems.
NOTICE
It is normal for an engine to consume a cer-
tain amount of oil. It is therefore often nec-
essary to top up the oil between services.
Check the engine oil level regularly.
Too high oil level can damage the engine.
Saab 9-3 Aero: The engine oil level is
checked each time the engine is started. If
the oil level is low, the following message
appears on the SID:
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 203
Engine oil and oil filter should be changed
according to the service program.
For oil volumes and grades, refer to “Tech-
nical data”.
Changing engine oil
WARNING
The oil should be drained when the engine
is warm. The car must stand on level
ground.
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged
skin contact whenever possible.
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of
the sump and leave the oil to drain into
a suitable receptacle for at least
10 minutes. Take care, as the oil may be
hot.
2 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
3 Change the oil filter once the engine oil
has drained (see page 204).
• Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by
washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Drain plug
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
• Do not touch the turbocharger or
exhaust manifold. These get very hot
when the engine has been running.
4 Fill with new oil.
Run the engine to normal temperature and
check the oil level.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the
engineasthiscouldcauseafire. Used
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not
dispose of oil into the ground or down
a drain. Dispose of all used oil and
oil filters at an appropriate disposal
facility.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204
Car care
Changing filter
Air filter
1 Unscrew the oil filter cap.
• Lift the cap slightly and carefully pry
apart the cap and the filter housing.
WARNING
• Remove the filter cap.
To ensure reliable operation, only use
an air filter recommended by Saab
Automobile AB.
2 Remove the filter. Have paper towelling
or a rag at hand to catch the oil that
escapes from the filter.
3 Fit a new filter.
4 Fit anewO-ringinthecap. Applyasmall
amount of new engine oil to the O-ring.
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
5 Screwonthecap. Thecorrecttightening
torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf. ft).
Oil filter
Automatic transmission
Check and top up the oil in accordance with
the service program.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 205
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking the coolant level.
Coolant
When the engine is cold, the coolant must
not lie above the KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank (boundary between the
upper and lower sections of the tank, see
illustration).
Top up with a mixture of equal parts of
Saab-approved antifreeze and clean water.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is
boiling when you open the hood.
Never remove the expansion-tank
filler cap when the radiator is boiling.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant
is added, run the engine until warm so that
the thermostat opens. Top up the tank
again, as necessary.
• The cooling system is pressurized –
hot coolant and vapor can escape
when the filler cap is released. These
can cause injury to your eyes and
burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and
let the engine cool before removing
the cap.
Coolant expansion tank
The properties of the coolant are retained
for the entire service life of the car. There-
fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-
ant.
• Exercise care when adding coolant.
Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a
fire risk.
The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and
anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best
cooling effect. Lowerconcentrations should
be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.
Other brands of antifreeze can damage the
engine and cooling system.
If the coolant level drops too low, the follow-
ing message appears on the SID:
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206
Car care
Brake/clutch fluid and
brake pads
NOTICE
If the cooling system needs topping up,
mix the antifreeze with the appropriate
quantity of drinking water or distilled
water before adding it to the system.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs
waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow
vapor to form in the brake system, thus
reducing its performance. It is therefore
important that brake fluid be changed
regularly, as specified in the service
program.
If undiluted antifreeze is added, the
enginecouldstillfreezeandbedamaged.
This is because the antifreeze will not mix
properly with the coolant before the ther-
mostat has opened to allow full circula-
tion.
Brake fluid reservoir
Note:
If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-
time properties will be affected. Even if the
coolant is flushed from the system and
replaced with life-time coolant, life-time
properties are no longer retained and the
coolant must then be drained and replaced
at regular intervals.
Checking
Brake fluid should be changed according to
the service program. Refer to the Warranty
and Service Book.
The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans-
parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.
The fluid level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the
reservoir corresponds to the amount of
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not
necessary.
If the brake fluid should require chang-
ing, this must be carried out at a Saab
dealer.
If the level drops too low, the following mes-
sage appears on the SID:
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake
fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 207
The foot brake and parking brake are self-
adjusting.
Power steering
Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal
pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether
the brake pads are worn and need replac-
ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads
be checked regularly, as specified in the
service program.
WARNING
Power steering fluid on hot engine
components constitutes a fire risk.
Checkthelevelofthepower steering fluidin
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with
the service program.
The wheels should point directly forwards
during this check.
Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.
Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw
down the cap completely and then remove
it again.
The oil level should lie between the MAX
and MIN marks when the oil temperature is
about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the
level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-
tures the level will be higher.
NOTICE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,
since it can cause the paint to bubble and
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area
should be flushed with large quantities of
water as quickly as possible.
Power steering fluid reservoir
Brake pads should only be changed at a
Saab dealer. To ensure optimum brake
performance, use only Saab genuine
brake pads.
Top up with “CHF 11S power steering fluid”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
Car care
If frequent short journeys are made, the
battery may need extra charging. This can
be done with a battery charger or by taking
the car for a long run.
If the battery is not being charged while the
engine is running, the following message
will appear on the SID:
Battery
WARNING
• When working on the battery, highly
explosive gas can build up. A spark
could ignite this gas that collects
around the battery.
Therefore, always avoid sparks and
open flames in the vicinity of the
battery.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Check the drive belt (see page 210). If the
belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,
the battery may not be charged and the A/C
compressor may not work.
• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-
ric acid. Always wear a face mask or
goggles when working on the battery.
Checking the battery electrolyte level.
Level correct if level indicator dark.
Battery should be changed if indicator is
light
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or
splashes onto skin or clothing, wash
the affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large
quantity makes contact with the skin,
seek medical help.
Check thechargestateandelectrolytelevel
of the battery regularly.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands after
handling
NOTICE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe
stored away from sub-zero temperatures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 209
Always connect the positive (red) cable to
the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the
negative (black) cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery. Always disconnect
both battery leads when boost charging the
battery.
NOTICE
• If boost charging never use anything
but a 12-volt charger, see page 193.
• Do not connect the battery termi-
nals, + and –, incorrectly.
Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to
unlock the battery cover.
Battery bracket
• Serious damagecanoccur to the car’s
electricalsystem ifabattery oralterna-
tor lead is disconnected while the
engine is running.
• Exercise special care when removing
and fitting the positive (+) cable so as
not to damage the battery disconnect
switch.
A car with standard equipment specifica-
tions and a fully charged battery can be left
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge
may only be sufficient for about 15 days.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210
Car care
Drive belt
WARNING
• Keephands and clothingclearofdrive
belts when engine is running.
• Always stop the engine before
inspecting the drive belt.
• The radiator fan is electric and can
start even when the engine is
switched off.
Drive belt
NOTICE
A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can
result in:
Serious damage can be done to the car’s
electrical system if an alternator lead is
disconnected while the engine is running.
• no charge to the battery
• no A/C compressor function.
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted
automatically by the belt tensioner.
The alternator is situated on the right-hand
side of the engine. It is driven by a
poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 211
Wipers and washers
Wiper blades
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.
If poor wiper performance is experienced,
clean the windshield with washer fluid. This
is particularly important if the car has been
through an automatic car wash, as these
sometimes leave a wax coating on the wind-
shield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,
fit new blades.
Change of wiper blades
Washer fluid reservoir
To fit new blades:
Washers
1 Press in the catch (1).
2 Pull the complete wiper blade down-
wards so that it comes away from the
wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out
from the arm.
WARNING
Takecare not tospillwasher fluid concen-
trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid
concentrate can contain flammable ingre-
dients such as alcohol.
The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.
(5.8 litres).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212
Car care
When the washer fluid level drops below
1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if
equipped) are deactivated. This is in order
to prioritize the windshield. The following
message is displayed on the SID:
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Headlight washers are only available on
certain markets.
Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water
as recommended by the table on
the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing
and to ensure effective cleaning (see also
page 100).
To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated automatically while the windshield is
washed. The recirculation symbol will how-
ever not light up. This function is optional;
contact a Saab dealer.
Washer jets
The washer jets, which are adjustable, can
be cleaned with a pin if necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 213
If a stop light bulb fails
If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to
ensure traffic safety. Change the broken bulb when possible.
Changing bulbs
All rear light bulbs are of the same type and rated 21 W, with the
exception of the license plate lighting which is rated 5 W.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine
to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving
parts.
Wrong bulb fitted
If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a rating is fitted, a bulb
failure message will be shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb
can damage the reflector).
The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off.
If the following message is displayed but the bulb shines, it is most
likely that an incorrect bulb has been fitted.
NOTICE
Right high beam failure.
Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible
short-circuiting.
Note:
Autochecking of lights
When changing bulbs, fit the same type of bulb (e.g. Long-Life)
as that removed.
The bulbs that are most important from the point of view of traffic
safety are monitored by the car’s electrical system. If one of these
bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.
Headlight aiming, page 258.
Example of SID message:
Left low beam failure.
The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights,
reversing lights, license plate lighting, side marker lights and side
direction indicators.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214
Car care
Xenon headlight, dipped beam
(certain variants only)
WARNING
Xenon headlights are high tension. All work on xenon headlights,
including changing bulbs, must be carried out by dealer person-
nel.
Xenon headlights produce roughly two times as much light as halo-
gen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.
The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.
When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the
xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.
Contact a Saab dealer to have a xenon
headlight changed
Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling
system is comprised of two sensors, one on the front suspension
and one on the rear suspension, and acontrolunit by theenginebay
fuse box. Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s
load to prevent dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.
If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be dis-
played on the SID:
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 215
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the low beam bulb
Low beam, halogen
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 233.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216
Car care
Retainers on the battery cover
Changing the high beam bulb
High beam, halogen
Left-hand side
Left-hand side
1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)
in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.
5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.
5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),
see page 233.
NOTICE
Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could
damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is
not designed to cope with higher wattages.
Both sides
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.
2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder
from the reflector.
3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.
Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until
it locks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 217
Both sides:
1 Remove the cover from the rear of the
headlight.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp
unit.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-
light.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Parking lights
The parking light bulb is located in the same
reflector as the main beam bulb.
Front turn signal bulbs
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Left-hand side:
1 Lift aside the hose running along the
side of the battery cover.
2 Release the two retainers on the battery
cover and remove the cover.
3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.
4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge
of the battery box.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218
Car care
Both sides:
Side-mounted turn signal bulbs
1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it.
2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its
rear end can be pulled out.
2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.
Change the bulb.
3 To fit, engage the two catches on the
rear edge of the lamp fitting with the
edge of the opening. Then press in the
front edge of the lamp fitting so that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge.
3 Fit the new bulb.
4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the
headlight lens when fitting the bulb.
Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.
Left-hand side:
5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the
battery box.
6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.
7 Refit the battery cover and hose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 219
1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.
Lower the air shield.
2 Remove the protective cover. Release
the two spring clips securing the bulb.
3 Unplug the connector.
4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the
glass part of the bulb with your fingers.
The height of the beam can be adjusted
using a screwdriver inserted through the
hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.
Front fog lights
WARNING
Side marker lights
1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front
part can be pulled out.
2 Fit the new bulb.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
3 When refitting, make sure that the
groove in the spring engages the plastic
edge of the bumper trim.
• Refer to the information on jacks on
pages 248 and 249.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220
Car care
Taillights, Sport Sedan
1 Turn signals
2 Taillights/stop lights
3 Reversing lights
4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)
5 High-mounted stop light
Stop lights, taillights and turn
signal bulbs, Sport Sedan
1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the
lights.
Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet
by depressing the centre no more than
3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet
and pull it out. Refer also to page 221.
2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing
that secures the bulb holder.
Stop lights, taillights and turn
signal bulbs, Convertible
1 Remove the cover.
2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a
bayonet fitting.
Taillights, Convertible
3 Change the bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder and cover.
3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb
holder home so that the plastic lug
snaps into place.
If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight
willactasastoplighttoensuretrafficsafety.
Change the broken bulb when possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 221
Changing bulbs
Reversing lights and rear fog
light, Sport Sedan
Reversing lights and rear fog
lights, Convertible
1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb
holder.
2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder
unit from the lamp housing. Change the
bulb.
3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so
that it snaps into place.
To refit the trunk lid trim
Removing the trunk lid trim
Removing the trunk lid trim
1 Remove the two screws securing the
grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.
2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the center of each rivet. Pull out the
rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.
You can use the button on the handle of the
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
the rivets.
1 Remove the two screws securing the
grab handle to the inside of the trunklid.
2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in
the centre of each rivet no more than
3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold
of the rivet’s collar.
You can use the button on the handle of the
screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock
the rivets.
1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222
Car care
Changing bulbs
Dome light, front, Sport Sedan
1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the guide lugs onthe front edgeof
the lens and press the lens home.
Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan
1 Remove the entire overhead panel:
ease out the trailing end first, and then
both sides of the front edge.
1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with
the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a
bayonet fitting.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Refit the bulb holder.
To refit the trunk lid trim
2 Fit the new bulb.
1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.
2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.
3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by
pressing the center buttons in until flush
with the collar.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 223
Hatch opened for replacement of centre
bulb
Reverse side of the light fitting. The
arrows mark the outer bulbs
Dome light, Convertible
1 Pull down the rear edge of the light
fitting.
2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open
the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb
out of the bulb holder.
Ifoneoftheouterbulbsneedsreplacing,
turn the light fitting round. Change the
bulb from the reverse of the lighting
fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.
3 Position the front edge of the light fitting
and press the fitting up towards the
windscreen rail.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224
Car care
License plate lighting
1 Undo the two screws and remove the
lens.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Make sure the seal on the lens is
correctly seated.
Glove box lighting
Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan
The lamp fitting is located under the parcel
shelf.
(certain variants only)
1 Remove the lamp housing using a short
screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down
one end.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
4 Refit the lens and tighten the two
screws.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 225
Other bulbs
If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-
ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.
Trunk lighting, Convertible
1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.
2 Change the bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Courtesy/floor lighting
(certain variants only)
1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting
using a screwdriver.
2 Fit the new bulb.
3 Insert the connector side first when refit-
ting the lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226
Car care
Bulb table
No. Designation Watt-
age
1
2
3
H7
55 Headlight
H3
55 Front fog lights
P21W
21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;
reversing lights
4
5
PY21W
R10W
21 Direction indicator, front/rear
10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy lighting;
glove box lighting; trunk lighting, Con-
vertible
6
R5W
5
License plate lighting; trunk lighting,
Sport Sedan
7
8
T4W
4
5
Reading light, rear
WY5W/W5W
Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);
parking lights; front dome lighting
NOTICE
Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage
could damage the wiring harness and electronics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 227
The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:
one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of
the dash, one in the engine bay (additional
small unit in front of battery) and one on the
left-hand side of the trunk. There is space
for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand
end of the dash.
Fuses
WARNING
To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or
fire breaking out in the electrical system,
the following should be heeded:
• Always consult an Saab dealer before
modifying or adding any electrical
equipment. Failure to do so can result
in the electrical system being
damaged.
Sound fuse / Blown fuse
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it
from the panel. If the filament is broken, the
fuse has blown.
• Never replace a fuse with one having
a higher rating than specified (see
page 229). The color of the fuse indi-
cates its amperage.
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,
have the electrical system checked by
an Saab dealer.
• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that
there is a major fault in the electrical
system. Have the car checked without
delay by an Saab dealer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228
Car care
Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not
connected to the car’s electrical system.
MAXI fuses
The car also has a number of large fuses
known as MAXI fuses. These are designed
to protect the car’s electrical system from
being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a
number of electrical circuits and functions
and therefore has a higher rating (amper-
age) than the standard fuses. No spare
MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.
NOTICE
Ifa MAXI fuseblows, there is amajor fault
in the electrical system. Have the car
checked at a Saab dealer.
Fuse panel in end of dash
Aspecialtoolforremovingfusesisprovided
on the hatch on the left-hand end of the
dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,
squeeze and remove the fuse.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 229
12
13
14
15
10
20
Interior lighting incl. glove box
Accessories
Radio, sound system I; control panel,
Infotainment System
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
30
-
Control module in driver’s door
-
-
-
7.5 Manual climate control; fan
-
-
7.5 Headlight levelling switch
7.5 Hands-free; brake light switch; manual climate
control; clutch pedal switch
Fuse panel in end of fascia
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
40
Cigarette lighter
Cabin fan
No. Amp. Function
1
2
3
4
15
5
Steering wheel lock
7.5 Airbag control module
Steering column unit; ignition switch
Hands-free; CD-player/CD-changer in cabin; SID
-
-
10
10
5
Yaw sensor (cars with ESP)
-
Main instrument unit; manual climate control;
automatic climate control (ACC)
-
5
7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock
(automatic transmission)
6
7
7.5 Brake light switch
20
Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door
Control module in passenger front door
Dash fuse panel
8
30
10
30
9
10
Trailer socket; electrical socket in storage compart-
ment between seats
11
10
Data link connection (diagnostics)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230
Car care
Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side
No. Amp. Function
1–5 MAXI -
6
7
8
9
30 Control module in left rear door
30 Control module in right rear door
20 Trailer
-
-
10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail-
light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;
trailer lights
11
12
13
14
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15 15 Seat heating, left seat
16 15 Seat heating, right seat
Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan
17
7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror; rain sensor
18 15 Sunroof
19
20
21
7.5 Telematics (OnStar)
7.5 DVD player (navigation system)
7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA); control module in
rear doors
22 30 Amplifier, sound system III
23
-
-
24 10 Movement sensor; CD changer in trunk (accessory)
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 231
26 30 Right-handstoplight;rearleftturnsignal;lefttaillight;
rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate light-
ing; trunk lighting; trailer lights
27 10 Convertible:Lumbarsupport,electricallyadjustable
front seat
28
29
-
-
-
-
Trunk fuse panel, Convertible
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232
Car care
14
-
-
15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights
16 30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and
right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;
front left fog light
17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed
18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed
19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater
20 10 Headlight levelling
21
22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield
23
-
-
-
-
Fuse panel in engine bay
24 20 Flash-to-pass
No. Amp. Function
25 20 Amplifier, sound system II
1
2
-
-
26 30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right
fog light; right low beam; left high beam
10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con-
trol module
27 MAXI
–37
3
4
20 Horn
10 Engine control module
5
-
-
6
10 Selector lever, automatic transmission
7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
9
10
11
12
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 233
Relays
R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield
R 2 -
R 3 -
R 4 -
R 5 Flash-to-pass
R 6 Horn
R 7 -
R 8 Starter motor
R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF
R10 -
Fuse panel in front of battery
R11 Ignition +15
R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed
No. Amp. Function
R13 -
1
2
-
-
R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights
20
Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda
probe)
R15 -
R16 -
3
4
10
30
A/C compressor
Main relay
Relays
1 -
2 A/C-compressor
3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)
4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234
Car care
Adjust the tire pressure to match the current
load and speed of the car (see page 277).
The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,
i.e. tires that are the same temperature as
the outside air temperature. Tire pressure
increases as the tires become warm (e.g.
during highway driving) by approximately
0.3 bar (4 psi). When thetemperatureof the
tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-
sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires
The Tire-Loading Information label shows
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi-
cle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that
enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If
you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Saab Warranty and Service Record
Booklet for details.
WARNING
Neverreducethepressureofahottire. Ifthe
tires are hot when you check them, only
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Poor maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Bad wear
• Bad handling
• Bad fuel economy
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an blow-out
and a serious accident. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 243.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resultingaccidentcouldcauseserious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
tion), you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Bad handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact – such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recom-
mended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
yourtreadisbadly worn, or if yourtires
have been damaged, replace them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 235
ontheTire-LoadingInformationlabel. Make
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-
ened. See page 249.
When to check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys
or when the car is driven hard. After the car
has been parked with hot tires and the tires
havecooleddown,aflatspotcanforminthe
tire, where it is in contact with the ground.
The same can occur if the car has not been
moved for a long time.
Flat spots can cause vibration that can be
felt through the steering wheel, similar to
that experiencedwhenthewheels needbal-
ancing.
Flat spots of this type disappear once the
tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles
(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If
the outdoor temperature is low it takes a
longer distance.
How to Check
WARNING
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause an accident.
rust or dirt from places where the wheel
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on
page 248.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles
(12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” on page 236 and “Wheel
Replacement” on page 239 for more infor-
mation.
Thepurposeofregularrotationistoachieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-
cle. The first rotation is the most important.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left
rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to
right rear. Right rear to left front.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
Car care
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire-Loading Information
label.
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than
those supplied with the car, consult your
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities
available.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not
approved by Saab can negatively affect the
car’s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is
tocheckthetreadwearindicators, whichwill
appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
Treadwear indicator
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
Treadwear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the
form of smooth, treadless strips across the
width, which become visible when only
2/32"(1.6 mm)oftreadremains. Assoonas
the indicators become visible, new tires
should be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal
limit for minimum tread depth in your
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter (snow) tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 237
The wheels and tires have been carefully
matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire
combination will work in the best possible
way, just because it can be fitted to the car.
To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-
rate as possible it should be reprogrammed
if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.
Contact a Saab dealer.
Because of front wheel drive, the front tires
tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New
tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that
tires on the same axle have the same
amount of tread.
NOTICE
WARNING
Always consult your Saab dealer before
changingthecar’swheelsortiresonyour
Saab.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes or types (radial and bias-
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to
use the same size and type tires on all
wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was devel-
oped for use on your vehicle. See
Widewheels and tires withside walls that
are too low can:
• be damaged in potholes, etc.
• cause springs, shock absorbers and
wheel bearings and body mountings
to be overloaded.
• affect the function of the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP).
“Compact spare” on page 246.
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never
standing upright.
The speed and load limits of the tires
must not be exceeded; see page 242.
WARNING
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted
on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The
permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238
Car care
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200TractionAA Temperature
A
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-
tion and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United
States.) The grades are molded on the side-
walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-
form Tire Quality Grading system does not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12
inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-
duction tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary
withrespecttothesegrades, they mustalso
conform to federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire Perfor-
mance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance. Warn-
ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Warning:Thetemperaturegradeforthistire
is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, orexcessiveloading,
either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 239
Used Replacement Wheels
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best overall per-
formance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-
ing one way or the other, the alignment may
need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Alwaysusethecorrectwheel, wheelbolts
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you
have to replace a wheel, use a new GM
original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cool-
ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-
cle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and
wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions
exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you
need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,
offset and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheelboltsorwheelnuts, replacethemonly
with new Saab original equipment parts.
This way, you will be sure to have the right
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
vehicle.
See “Changing a tire” on page 248.
WARNING
When fitting just one new pair of tires,
these should be fitted to the rear wheels,
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels
should therefore be moved to the front.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240
Car care
Notice: If your vehicle does not have
225/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suit-
able snow chains. Install them on the
front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chainmanufacturer’sinstructions.Ifyou
can hear the chains contacting your
vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the
contact continues, slow down until it
stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
Tire Chains
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
ifyoushouldeverhavea“blowout”, hereare
a few tips about what to expect and what to
do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-
tain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts
much like a skid and may require the same
correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear
blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-
ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go.
Itmaybeverybumpyandnoisy,butyoucan
still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off
the road if possible.
WARNING
If your vehicle has 225/45 R17 size tires,
don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough
clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or
othervehicleparts.Theareadamagedby
the tire chains could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that manu-
facturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it’s
contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin
your wheels.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use your jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 241
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
tires based on the performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resis-
tance. For more information see “Uniform
Tire Quality Grading” on page 238.
Maximum ColdInflation Load Limit: Max-
imum load that can be carried and the max-
imum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pres-
sure see “Recommended lowest tire pres-
sure, cold tires” on page 277 and “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 243.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded
into it´s sidewall.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example
of a typical passenger car tire size.
Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a partic-
ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-
struction type and service description.
Department of Transportation (DOT):
The Department of Transportation (DOT)
code indicates that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety standards.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-
ters and numbers following DOT code are
the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-
factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire.
Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
215 / 55
R
16 93
H
|
|
|
|
|
|
f
a
b
c
d
e
a Tire Width
b Aspect Ratio
c Belt Rating
d Rim diameter
e Load range
f Speed rating
Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-
cates the tire section width in millimeters
from sidewall to sidewall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242
Car care
Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-
cates the tire height-to-width measure-
ments. For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-
tration, it would meanthat the tire´s sidewall
is 55% as high as it is wide.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different
markings in a tire size is given below for a
tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:
225 Tire section width, mm
Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construction; the
letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-
struction; and the letter “B” means belted-
bias ply construction.
Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Load range:Theload range representsthe
load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.
45 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height
as a percentage of the section
width
TIN-code
a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark
b Tire Size
R Radial ply
17 Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead
seats
c Tire Type Code
d Date of Manufacture
94 Tire load index
H Speed rating
Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a
tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings
range from “A” to “Z”.
Tire load indices
91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.
(615 kg)
93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)
94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)
Speed ratings
Q Tire approved for speeds up to
100 mph (160 km/h)
S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)
T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)
H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)
V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)
W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 243
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-
dards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-
meric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand
and date of production.
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tirepressingoutwardoneachsquareinchof
thetire. Airpressureis expressedinpounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the com-
bined weight of optional accessories, for
example, automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and air conditioning.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 243.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s
height to its width.
This label can only be found on vehicles
sold in the U.S.
Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire
information label in the glove box, see
page 278.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”
on page 269.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
therearaxle, see“LoadingYourVehicle”on
page 243.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other rein-
forcing materials.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extendto the beads are laidat
alternate angles substantially less than 90
Cold Inflation Pressure: Theamount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before
a tire has built up heat from driving. See
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 234.
Curb weight: This means the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers
and cargo.
This is an example of what your vehicle´s
Tire-Loading Information/Certification label
might look like. It is located on the B-pillar
and shows how much weight your vehicle
may properly carry. The label tells you the
proper size, and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It
also gives you important information about
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the Vehicle
CapacityWeight, andincludesthe weightof
all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-
installed options.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air
pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on light duty trucks and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244
Car care
Maximum Load rating: The load rating for
a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The
sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-
cle capacity weight; and production options
weight.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-
sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure
to which a tire may be inflated.
Normal occupant weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-
tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading
Your Vehicle” on page 243.
cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-
tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see
“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 234 and
“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 243.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are
terline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and
tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the
Speed rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and
the road surface. The amount of grip pro-
vided.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called “wear bars”, that show
across the tread of a tire when only
2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is
Time for New Tires” on page 236.
Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-
dards, a tire information system that pro-
vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s
traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-
ings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The
rating are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on
page 238.
VehicleCapacityWeight:Isthenumber of
designated seating positions multipled by
150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo
load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on
page 243.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load
on an individual tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant weight and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing original
equipment tire size and the recommended
cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” on page 243.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-
ing positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that facesoutward whenmounted on avehi-
cle. The sideof thetire that contains a white-
wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-
turer, brand and or model name molding on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 245
5 Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1 Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed
XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s
placard.
2 Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3 Substract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for
winter climates where the majority of your
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab
dealer can advise you of to the correct size
tire for your car (if different from the original
size) and also supply Saab approved winter
tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.
Winter tires normally use a different speed
ratingcomparedtosummer/allseasontires.
Make sure not to exceed the stated speed
rating on the tires you use.
4 The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =
650 lbs.).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246
Car care
The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its
crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.
Compact spare
Foldthecarpetingforwardtoeaseaccessto
the tools and spare tire.
WARNING
The screwdriver handle has a “button” for
removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet
must be removed when changing the light
bulb in the trunk lid (see page 221).
The spare tire or punctured tire must be
stowedunder thetrunkfloor, andsecured
in place with the retaining nut.
The compact spare is light and easy to
handle when changing the tire. Its use is
only permitted whena standardtire hassus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the
tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).
Date code
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the
compact spare fitted.
The tire pressure should be 60 psi
(420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the
spare wheel well under the trunk floor.
“Driving with the compact spare tire”, see
page 193.
Tire date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable
goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes
progressively harder, and the roadholding
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly true on winter tires.
Tires havea code thatspecifiestheir dateof
manufacture. The first two digits denote the
week number and the last two digits the
year.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted
as soon as possible.
Accordingly, a date code of 3701 signifies
that the tire was manufactured in week 37,
2001.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 247
Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer
tion, to monitor driving speed since you
must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tools under a panel in the trunk
NOTICE
To avoid damaging an alloy wheel with a
flat tire, this can be placed outside up in
the spare-wheel well but only while driv-
ing to the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment (see page 143).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248
Car care
Changing a tire
To beeven more certain the vehiclewon't
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire, on the other side, at the opposite end
of the vehicle.
• The jack should be stored correctly
under the carpeting in the trunk. If it
lies loose in the car, it could thrown
forward and cause personal injury in
the event of a crash or if the car rolls
over.
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed if
the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for chang-
ing a flat tire.
• The car jack is designed solely for use
in changing a tire or fitting snow
chains. It must not be used to
support the car during repair work
or servicing.
• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner
threadsofthewheelboltsifthecarhas
been driven for several years exclu-
sively with alloy wheels.
If steel wheels are being installed, the
bolt hole threads in the brake hubs
should be cleaned before the thinner
steel wheels are fitted. It may other-
wise not be possible to achieve the
correct clamping force, despite tight-
ening the wheel bolts to the correct
torque.
• Never crawl under a car that is
supported only by a jack. Always use
axle stands.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they couldbebadly injured or evenkilled.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
• Raising your vehicle too high or with
the jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even make
thevehiclefall. Tohelpavoidpersonal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to
fit the jack lift head into the proper
locationbeforeraisingthevehicle,and
raise the vehicle only far enough off
thegroundsothereisenoughroomfor
the spare tire to fit (no more than
1 Set the parking brake firmly.
2 If you have an automatic transmis-
sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).
For a manual transmission, leave the
car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).
3 Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
25 mm or 1 inch clearance between
the ground and the bottom of the tire).
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if
the car is on a road.
4 Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 249
When the car has to be lifted, the jack must
be positioned at one of the four jacking
points (front or rear) under the sill members.
If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must
be positioned under the normal jacking
points, see illustration. If the car is equipped
with a towbar, the jack can also be placed
under this.
NOTICE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points
indicated on the body.
Marking of jacking points
Jacking points
1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height
before placing it under the jacking point.
Each jacking point is indicated by an
arrow on the sill (see illustration).
Make sure that the jack fully engages
the jacking point in the underside of the
sillmemberandthattheentirefootofthe
jack is steady and flat on the ground.
The jack must not stand on snow, ice or
similar.
2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel
cover.
4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact
surfaces between the wheel and brake
disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the
wheel hub.
5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts
before fitting, see page 251. Fit the
wheel and screw in the bolts in the
sequenceshownonpage 251(opposite
pairs).
If, none the less, you wish to remove the
wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge
and pull it straight out.
Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.
3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of
theground. Removethewheelboltsand
lift off the wheel.
Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift
the car.
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel
bolts to torque in sequence as shown on
the following page.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250
Car care
Jacking points for floor jack
Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-
faces between the wheel and brake disc.
Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel
hub.
NOTICE
7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty
or so miles.
• Do not overtighten the bolts using a
impact wrench: not only can this
damage the wheels but it can also
make it impossible to undo the bolts
using the wheel wrench in the car’s
toolkit.
Tightening torque:
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).
We advise against using wheels with large
ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-
ponents are then more exposed to slush,
road salt and grit.
If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the
speedometer can be reprogrammed to
ensureitis as accurateaspossible. Contact
a Saab dealer.
• When refitting a wheel cover, make
sure that the valve protrudes through
the marked recess in the wheel cover.
Driving with tire chains, see page 182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 251
Safety belts
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,
door armrests and headlining, use a
vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a
clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using
a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy
water.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a crash, the safety
belts, belt pretensioners and other asso-
ciated components must be inspected at
a Saab dealer.
When using a stain remover, always work
from the outside towards the centre to avoid
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should
remain, it can usually be removed using
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Never make any alterations or repairs to
the safety belts yourself but visit a Saab
dealer.
Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or
thin oil, must be removed at once with an
absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-
ling. Then clean with a stain remover.
White spirit is recommended for removing
grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush
may also be used.
Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin
layer of grease
Check the function of the safety belts regu-
larly as follows:
• Holdthediagonalstrapand pull it sharply.
The safety belt should lock and it should
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor.
They must not have suffered rust damage.
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts
Cleaning and caring for leather
upholstery
If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it
should be replaced.
The principal reason for treating leather
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film.
Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear
mainly affects the lighter shades, although
this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,
the patina resulting from use is often consid-
ered desirable inleather. But if the leather is
allowed to becometoo grubby, itcan startto
look shabby.
Safety belts must not come into contact with
substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-
cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with
warm water and a detergent or have them
replaced.
The leather upholstery should be cleaned
and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc-
tion with spring and autumn inspections. In
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
Car care
very warm, dry climates the leather may
need more regular reconditioning. Use con-
ventional leather care products. Follow the
instructions on the packaging.
Do not use unknown harsh polishing
agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse
soap or hot water.
Engine bay
NOTICE
The engine bay should be cleaned with an
engine decreasing and rinsed with hot
water. The headlights must be covered
over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid
spraying electrical components and con-
nectors.
Donotusealcohol-basedcleanersonthe
plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as
these can cause a crackling effect on the
lenses.
The door mirrors should be folded in
before the car enters an automatic car
wash.
Textile carpeting
Textile carpeting should be vacuum
cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be
cleanedusing abrushorsponge andcarpet
shampoo.
For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that
are not earthed (grounded) must not be
used out of doors.
Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol-
vent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally-friendly decrescendos.
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the
underside of thecarby handifthecar is usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather
immediately after washing to avoid smears
and streaks.
Clean the inside of window glass using a
proprietary window cleaner. This is particu-
larly important when the car is new, as
upholstery and trim have a tendency to
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well polished, as this helps
to prevent misting.
Washing
The bodywork must be washed frequently.
When the car is new, the body should be
washed by hand using plain cold water and
a clean, soft brush through which the water
flows. Automatic caresses should be
avoided when the car is new.
After 5–6 months the paintwork will have
hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable
detergent can be added to the water, which
should be lukewarm.
Remove any bird droppings without delay,
as these can discolor the paintwork and
prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet
paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a
minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off
the dirt.
Clean the outside of the windows with Saab
washer fluid. This is especially important if
the car has been washed in an automatic
car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is
used that can contaminate the windshield
and impair the performance of the wipers.
Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit
to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not
use strong cleaners, as these can dry out
the paintwork.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 253
IntheU.S., Saab offers afull complementof
car care products. See your dealer or visit
us at www.saabcatalog.com.
Waxing and polishing
NOTICE
Do not wax a new car during the first three
or four months. In fact, there is no need to
polish the car before the paintwork has
started to dull through oxidation. Other than
in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive
polishescontainingacuttingagentonanew
car. Always wash the car thoroughly before
waxing or polishing.
Convertible:
• Try yourbrakesonleavingacarwash.
Wet brake discs reduce the perfor-
mance of the brakes.
• Wash the soft top with a mild soap solu-
tion and lukewarm water. For spot clean-
ing the top, a finger nail brush can also be
used. Stroke the brush in the direction of
the fabric, not across the threads.
• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile
phone, must be removed if the car
goes through an automatic car wash.
• If a pressure washer is used be heedful of
the following recommendations:
• on the lower part of the car (not higher
than the door handles): max pressure
of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.
(20 cm).
• on the upper part of the car: tax pres-
sure of 100 bar and not closer than
32 in. (80 cm).
• Do not use any drying chemicals or water-
proofing agents.
Touching up the paint
• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:
Do not spray the sensors or closer
than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with
a pressure washer, as this can
damage them.
Damaged paintwork should be treated as
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,
the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-
corrosionwarrantydoesnotcovercorrosion
resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is
usually extensive and can only be properly
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches
and stone chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer,
touch-up paint and brushes, are available
from your Saab dealer.
• Avoid automatic car washes.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,
where the metal has not been exposed and
an undamaged layer of paint remains,
touch-up paint can usually be applied
directly, after any dirt has been scraped
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, such as the
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken
back to the bare metal. The metal should
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254
Car care
then be primed with two thin coats of primer
applied by brush.
Aftertheprimerhasdried,applyseveralthin
layers of topcoat until the surface of the
repaired area is flush with the surrounding
paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to
dry before applying the next.
Anti-corrosion
treatment
The entire car undergoes a series of anti-
corrosion processes during production.
These include electrophoretic priming,
PVC-based coatingtoprotect againststone
chip damage and corrosion, and treatment
of body cavities and members with thin,
penetrating rustproofing oil.
Two-coat enamel
In addition, most body panels, such as the
hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is
applied in two operations. The first coat, the
base color, contains the pigment, metal
flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists
of a clear enamel, which provides the final
gloss for the paintwork and protects the
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts
of the car is constantly exposed to wear and
prone to damage. This applies particularly
to the underside of the car and inside the
wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the
like that are thrown up can give rise to cor-
rosion where the underseal has worn away.
The extent of this obviously depends on the
conditions in which the car is used.
Surface treatment composition
1 Body panel
2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm
3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm
4 Cathodic ED 23 µm
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm
6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm
7 Clear enamel 45 µm
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the
underside of the car often and to inspect the
condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-
sionwarrantydoesnotrelievethecarowner
oftheneedtocarryoutnormalmaintenance
to the rustproofing and to make good any
damage.
2 Then apply the primer, base color and
finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the
best finish, apply two or three coats of
primer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 255
Use a hose to clean the underside of the car
thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or
spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion
agent to any worn or damaged areas, to
prevent the onset of corrosion.
Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has
expired, it makes good sense to continue to
maintain the rustproofing.
Seams in the body, especially those in the
doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera-
ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by
grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to
corrosion from the inside, largely as a result
ofcondensation. Keeptheseamscleanand
at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen-
etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab
dealer will be pleased to give you further
advice.
What causes rust?
Preventive maintenance
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture
manage to penetrate the protective finish.
Body panelsmay rustthrough if theprocess
is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever
water is trapped or where the car’s panels
are continuously damp.
Damage to paint and undercoating by
stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-
ately exposes metal to air and moisture.
Road salts used for de-icing will collect on
the bottom of the car and promote rusting.
Areasofthecountrywithhighhumidityhave
a greater potential for rust problems, espe-
cially where salt is used on roads or there is
moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)
may also damage paint and promote rust-
ing.
The following procedures are necessary to
help protect against rusting. Refer also to
the terms and conditions of the Performa-
tion Limited Warranty described in the war-
ranty booklet.
1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at
least twice a year. Under adverse
conditions, where there is a rapid
buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash
your car at least once a week. After
extreme exposure to salted snow or
slush, evidenced by a white film on the
car, wash the car immediately. Frequent
washing will prevent paint damage from
acid rain and other airborne contami-
nants such as tree sap and bird drop-
pings. If any of these contaminants are
noticed on the car the finish should be
washed immediately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car
with water to loosen and flushoff heavy
concentrations of dirt (include the
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either
a good quality car soap or mild general
purpose (dish washing) detergent and
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a
chamois.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256
Car care
2 Clean the underside of the car during
the winter. Use high pressure water to
clean the car’s underside (floor panels,
wheel wells) at least at mid-winter and in
the spring.
3 Inspect the car frequently for leaks or
damage, and arrange for needed
repairspromptly. Afterwashingorafter
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for
paint damage. While checking for leaks,
lift the floor mats and check underneath
them. Water can collect in these areas
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry
any wet areas including the floor mats.
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Inspect the undercoating and touch up if
necessary. Pay particular attention to the
fenders and wheel housings, which are
exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If
the composition has worn or flaked off, the
steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried
before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning
is best done with a scraper and a steel wire
brush, followed by washing with solvent.
Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it
may run off or fall off when dry.
Recovery and/or
recycling of automotive
materials
A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),
plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-
monplace for a long time now.
To facilitate the sorting of other materials,
plastic parts, for instance, have been
marked to identify the precise nature of the
plastic.
Use touch-up paint to repair small
scratchesorminorfinishdamage. Areas
where metal is exposed will rust quickly
and MUST be repaired immediately by
touch-up or professional repainting.
Rust must be removed, the bare metal
primed and painted. Major body
damageshouldberepairedimmediately
and new panels or exposed areas
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s
responsibilityandarenot coveredunder
warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 257
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
NOTICE
Air conditioning (A/C)
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the
system checked at a Saab dealer.
WARNING
Do not use a pressure washer when
cleaning the condenser or radiator due to
the risk of damage.
• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C
system must be carried out at a Saab
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
Note:
When the A/C system is running, the intake
air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-
tion that forms on the evaporator is drained
off under the car. When the car is parked,
this may result in a small puddle forming on
the ground. The warmer the air and the
higher the relative humidity, the more con-
densation will be produced.
• The A/Csystemispressurized. Do not
break any connections or undo A/C
system components.
• The compressor drive belt should be
inspected under the regular service
program.
• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or
other personal injury.
• Clean away dirt and insects from the
condenser and radiator to prevent clog-
ging. Whenwashing the car, usethehose
to spray the radiator and condenser
(located in front of the radiator) from both
sides (both from the front of the car and
from inside the engine bay). Do not use a
pressure washer.
Caution: Do not hose down the radia-
tor and condenser while the engine is
hot.
Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Inadequate cooling
NOTICE
a Check that the controls for temperature
and air distribution are correctly set; see
“Manual climate-control system” on
page 103.
b Check that the condenser (in front of the
radiator) has not become clogged with
dirt and insects.
• The A/C system is designed for use
with R134a refrigerant.
• Refrigerant handling requires special
equipment and special procedures for
charging and draining the system.
c Make sure that the compressor drive
belt does not slip (see page 210).
• Never mix R 134a with other refriger-
ants.
d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans
and compressor (see page 229).
• Applicable to the manual climate control
system -During cold months the aircondi-
tioning should be switched on once or
twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes
during highway driving once the engine is
warm.
This action saves the gaskets in the
compressor from being spoiled. The
compressor uses a lubricant that circu-
lates with the coolant.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258
Car care
Note:
To check the aim, the vehicle should be
properly prepared as follows:
Headlight aiming
The A/C system cannot be switched on
whentheoutsidetemperatureisbelow32°F
(0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car
is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to
always have the A/C button pressed in. The
A/C system will then cut in automatically
when the outside temperature is high
enough.
• The vehicle shall be placed so that the
headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall or other flat surface. The
aiming area should be darkened, this will
improveyourabilitytoseethebeamofthe
low beam headlight being aimed.
An optical headlamp aimer can also be
used and will than replace the wall.
• The vehicle must have all four wheels on
a perfectly level surface which is level all
the way to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-
pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled
andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight
aiming is being done.
• The vehicleshould not have anysnow, ice
or mud attached to it.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid
dangerof fingers andhandsbeinginjured
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when
the engine is switched off.
The vehicle has a visual optical headlight
aiming system equipped with vertical
aiming device. The aim has been preset at
the factory and should normally not need
further adjustments.
If your headlights are damaged in a crash,
the headlight aim may be affected. If you
believe your headlights need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take it to
your Saab dealer for service. However, it is
possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas
described in the following procedure.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed
pressure.
NOTICE
• Close all doors.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle
low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will
be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps
are aimed properly.
To make sure that your headlights are
aimed properly read all instructions
before beginning. Failure to follow these
instructions could cause damage to
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed
headlight.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Car care 259
Vertical aiming device
1 Wall or garage door.
2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.
3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.
4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.
encerunbeforeaiming:Starttheengine
1 Open the hood and locate the vertical
aiming devices there are two vertical
aiming devices which shall be turned
simultaneously and the same amount of
turns.
and let the headlights do a reference
run. Turn off the engine but leave the low
beam on.
1 Aiming marker on headlight lens
Cars with halogen lights:
Turn on the low beam headlights.
Both variants:
2 Locate the marker on the lens.
Placeapieceofcardboardorequivalent
(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront
of the headlight not being aimed. This
should allow the beam cut-off of the
headlight being aimed to be seen on the
flat surface.
3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto
the aim marker No.1 on each lens.
Subtract 2 inches.
4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure
from the ground to the recorded
distance (see point 4) and draw a hori-
zontal line the width of the vehicle.
5 Cars with xenon lights:
Xenon lights with automatic headlight
levelling system must first do a refer-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260
Car care
NOTICE
Do not cover a headlight directly on the
lens to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlight may cause
excessive heat build-up that may cause
damage to the headlight.
6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws
simultaneously in the same direction
indicated on the headlight until the hori-
zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned
with the horizontal line on the wall.
Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface
Correctly adjusted low beam
7 If an optical headlight aimer device is
used follow point 1 and 2 and center the
lens of the optical headlight aimer
device at the intersection of the two
markers on the headlight lens.
Thenfollowtheinstructionsintheoptical
headlight aimer instruction manual and
point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 261
Customer Assistance and Information
Maintenance schedule __ 262
Owner assistance ______ 264
Reporting Safety Defects
(USA) _______________ 265
Reporting Safety Defects
to the Canadian
government__________ 265
Vehicle Data Collection
and Event Data
Recorders ___________ 266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262
Customer Assistance and Information
TIMEFORMAINSERVICE willbesetwhen
additional maintenance is necessary, such
asairfilterorsparkplugreplacement. When
the message Time for service. is displayed,
contact your Saab Dealer for a service
appointment.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
in a timely manner may result in serious
damage to key components or systems.
SERVICE INTERVALS
Maintenance schedule
Atimeforservicemessagewillilluminateon
theSaabInstrumentDisplay(SID)whenthe
car is due for regular maintenance. There
are three different messages that will
appear:
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a
service program to the purchaser/operator
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional
maintenance is recommended for specific
componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always a good practice!
TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections. This mes-
sage is set by the engine management
system which calculates service intervals
based on several factors including driving
habits, ambient temperature, number of
coldstarts,mileagedrivenandelapsedtime
since the last service. If mileage accumula-
tiondoesnotoccur, themessagewillbeset,
and maintenance required at a maximum of
2 years.
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able,
throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable
serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour
best choice.
TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE
SERVICE
indicates that an oil/filter change is required
along with several inspections and addi-
tionalmaintenancesuchas airfilter orspark
plug replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 263
Engine oil and filter changes
Service record retention
Service costs
Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired
at every service point. Use only a Saab
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API
service classifications stated in the “Techni-
cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual.
The use of extra additives in the oil is not
necessary and is not recommended, and
may be harmful to turbochargers.
It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser-
vice records. If possible, you should keep
copies of all shop work orders for all service
and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-
cated in the new car and emission control
system warranties, it is important to docu-
ment that all necessary maintenance has
been done.
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not
include the labor required to replace wear
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or
repairs found to be necessary as a result of
the inspections included in these times.
Additional labor and parts will be charged
for such work when necessary, except as
coveredunder an applicable Saabwarranty
or any optional extended service contract.
Transmission fluid changes or suspension
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material,
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay
also be applied to service and repair
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and
location.
HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA-
NIZED
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under
any of the following conditions:
The service record is comprised of a series
of coupons on which to record services as
they are performed. There are additional
coupons for documenting extra engine oil
and filter changes, extra automatic trans-
mission fluid services necessary for severe
service conditions, and brake fluid changes.
• Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–
16 km). This is particularly important
when outside temperatures are below
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling
(frequent stop-and-go traffic).
HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD
COUPONS
• Most trips are through dusty areas (such
as construction zones).
When thecar is brought toa Saab dealer for
scheduled maintenance, present the War-
ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-
vice manager. When the technician has
completed the service, the technician will
sign the maintenance record. The person
responsible for quality assurance at the
dealership will also sign and stamp the
record with the dealer identification stamp.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tions.
If your driving habits match this description,
have the engine oil and filter changed in-
between normal services. Theseconditions
cause the engine oil to break down faster.
The Warranties and Service Record Book-
let has provisions to record extra oil
changes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264
Customer Assistance and Information
Change of Address Notification
(U.S. and Canada)
Owner assistance
Two change of address cards are provided
at the end of the Warranties and Service
Record Booklet. Knowing your current
address allows Saab to contact you in the
event of a recall or service campaign.
Please help us keep our records up to date
for your own peace of mind.
Warranties and service problem
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner
assistance information including Saab
RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor
misplaced, a new one may be ordered
through a Saab dealer or by contacting
Saab.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3
and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through
your dealer. These are comprehensive
manuals on CD rom, geared to use by pro-
fessional technicians. Consult your Saab
dealer for prices for your model.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.
Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service
dealers is available for those planning to
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the
Customer Assistance Center in the country
in which they are traveling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance and Information 265
Reporting Safety
Defects (USA)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety
Defects to the Canadian
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in
addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you
will notify us. In Canada, please call our
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-
800-263-1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266
Customer Assistance and Information
To read this information, special equipment
is needed and access to the vehicle or the
SDM is required.
Saab will not access information about a
crasheventor share it with others other than
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-
cles, has a number of sophisticated com-
puter systems that monitor and control sev-
eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicleuses on-board vehicle comput-
erstomonitoremissioncontrolcomponents
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-
tions for air bag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and
to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-
cult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to
facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash
event by computer systems commonly
called event data recorders (EDR).
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of
the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police
or similar government office,
• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once Saab collects or receives
data, Saab may
• use the data for Saab research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be main-
tained and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-
tions for research purposes.
Others, suchaslawenforcement, mayhave
access to the special equipment that can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,
please check the OnStar® subscription ser-
vice agreement or manual for information
on its operations and data collection.
In a crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record
information about the condition of the vehi-
cle and how it was operated, such as data
related to engine speed, brake application,
throttle position, vehicle speed, steering
wheelangle, lateralacceleration,safetybelt
usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-
mance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehi-
cle crash performance and may be used to
improve crash performance of future vehi-
cles and driving safety. Unlike the data
recorders on many airplanes, these on-
board systems do not record sounds, such
as conversation of vehicle occupants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 267
Technical data
General data __________ 268
Engine _______________ 270
Engine oil_____________ 270
Fuel__________________ 271
Engines ______________ 271
Electrical system_______ 272
Drive belt _____________ 272
Manual transmission ___ 272
Automatic transmission_ 273
Suspension ___________ 273
Steering ______________ 273
Brake system__________ 274
Wheels and tires _______ 275
Plates and labels_______ 278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268
Technical data
General data
Overall length, including bumpers: ___
Overall width, including door mirrors __
Maximum height _________________
Wheelbase _____________________
Track:
182.5'' (4635 mm)
80.2'' (2038 mm)
57.8'' (1468 mm)
105.3'' (2675 mm)
Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1521 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)
Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum
permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.
Ground clearance at GVW _________
Number of seats (incl. driver):
approx. 120 mm
The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle
registration documents.
Sport Sedan ______________________
Convertible _______________________
Turning circle:
5
4
V.I.N. label
Curb weight
Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 37.4 ft. (11.4 m)
Curb to curb ______________________ 35.4 ft. (10.8 m)
Trunk length:
(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res-
ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 3200–3420 lbs.
(1450–1550 kg)
Rear seat raised ___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)
Rear seat lowered__________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)
Convertible _______________________ 29.1" (740 mm)
Trunk volume (SAE):
Convertible _______________________ 3570–3700 lbs.
(1620–1680 kg)
Gross vehicle weight (GVW):
Sport Sedan ______________________ 4120–4340 lbs.
(1870–1970 kg)
Sport Sedan ______________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)
Convertible, soft top raised___________ 12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)
Convertible, soft top folded ___________ 8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)
Convertible _______________________ 4460–4520 lbs.
(2025–2050 kg)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 269
Maximum axle load:
WARNING
Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)
Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)
Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)
Weight distribution:
• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are
fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of
these.
• When carrying a load in the trunk, make sure that it is lashed
down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat is
folded down.
Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),
front/rear (Sport Sedan and Convertible) approx. 60/40 %
GVW, front/rear (Sport Sedan and Con-
vertible)__________________________ approx. 50/50 %
Trailer:
Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan ____
Maximum load in trunk:
220 lbs. (100 kg)
Trailer with brakes________________
Trailer without brakes _____________
Recommended towball load ________
Max. 3500 lbs.
(1588 kg)
Sport Sedan ______________________ 175 lbs. (80 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)
Max. 1000 lbs.
(450 kg)
The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed:
110–165 lbs.
(50–75 kg)
See also page 186.
Sport Sedan ______________________ 925 lbs. (420 kg)
Convertible _______________________ 820 lbs. (372 kg)
Maximum theoretical towing speed, trailer
with brakes ____________________
60 mph (100 km/h)
Maximum combined weight of driver and
passengers ___________________
Whentowing atrailer, increasethe pressure
of the rear tires by 20 kPa (3 psi).
Sport Sedan (5x150 lbs.) ____________ 750 lbs. (340 kg)
Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________ 600 lbs. (272 kg)
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and
weights (see page 184).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270
Technical data
Engine
Engine oil
Type:
Four cylinders,
double overhead
camshafts,
16 valves, two
balancer shafts
To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all en-
gines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill oils.
Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental issues
are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved by
Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that
protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.
Cylinder bore____________________
Stroke _________________________
Swept volume ___________________
Idling speed_____________________
3.386'' (86 mm)
3.386'' (86 mm)
122 cu.in. (1.998 l)
Approved oils:
All gasoline engines - Fully Synthetic Engine Oil fulfilling GM-
LL-A-025 requirements.
To ensure being able to take advantage of the Saab specified
service intervals, be sure to select a fully synthetic engine oil
fulfilling GM-LL-A-025 requirements.
720 rpm.
When the engine
load increases, e.g.
thesteeringwheelis
turned, the idling
speed is raised to
900 rpm.
Servicing/Oil changes:
To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to
use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils ap-
proved for your engine. Service should be done according to
the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's
function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not
take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to ne-
glecting to meet above mentioned requirements.
Antifreeze ______________________
Coolant capacity _________________
Saab-approved
antifreeze
7.5 qts. (7.1 l)
At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil en-
gine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to meet
your engines specific needs. We recommend that you, with the
help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil from that
selection.
Other oil companies also have engine oils approved according
to GM specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet
your engines requirements. You should only use oil that meets
your engines specific requirements (GM-LL-A-025).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 271
Fuel
Recommended oil viscosities.
Viscosity is a measurement of the oils thickness. The thickness
influences, among other things, the fuel economy. For best
function Saab recommends:
Fuel tank capacity________________ 16.05 U.S. gal. (61 l)
For gasoline engines:
SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-30 or SAE 0W-40 engine oil.
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mends:
2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
Extra engine oil additives.
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all
you will need for good engine performance and protection.
Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not
lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall
slightly and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For
optimum performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.
For further information on fuel, see page 155.
When to change engine oil.
Your vehicle has a display (SID) where time for service will be
shown. Based not only on mileage but also on driving condi-
tions the mileage at which a service will be indicated can vary
considerably.
Engines
2.0t Ecopower
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 175 hp (129 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm____ 195 ft.lb. (265 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.5:1
Under normal circumstances the service indication will come on
at or around 15 000 miles or 2 years.
For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that
the right engine oil is used.
2.0T Ecopower
When the message for service is displayed you need to have
the required service done as soon as possible.
After the service your service personnel will reset the service in-
dicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to
optimize the time to the next service.
Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 210 hp (155 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm____ 221 ft.lb. (300 Nm)
Compression ratio _________________ 9.5:1
Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)
6.3 qts. (6.0 l)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272
Technical data
Electrical system
Manual transmission
Voltage ________________________
Battery capacity _________________
Starter motor____________________
Alternator rating:
12 V
Type __________________________
Fully synchronized
with final drive gear
and differential
60 Ah
1.8 kW
Oil type (for topping up)____________
Oil capacity:
Saab MTF 0063
Manual gearbox ___________________ 120 A/14 V
Automatic gearbox _________________ 140 A/14 V
5-speed _________________________ 1.9 qts. (1.8 l), to
level plug
Firing order _____________________
Spark plugs:
1-3-4-2
6-speed, 2.0 Turbo _________________ 3.15 qts. (3.0 l)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (5th gear) _________________
27–30 (43–48)
Type ____________________________ NGK PFR6T-10G
Electrode gap _____________________ 0.9–1.0 mm
Tightening torque __________________ 20 ft.lb. (28 Nm)
Speed, mph (km/h) at 1000 rpm in highest
gear (6th gear) _________________
29–34 (46–55)
Drive belt
Outside length___________________
40.472'' (1028 mm)
Drive belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 273
Automatic transmission
Suspension
Type __________________________
Electronically con-
trolled, 5-speed,
fully-automatic with
hydraulic torque
converter,planetary
gears and integral
final drive.
Spring type, front and rear _________
Maximum deflection of springs:
Coil springs
Front ____________________________ 7.0'' (178 mm)
Rear ____________________________ 8.3'' (212 mm)
Dampers, front and rear ___________
Gas-filled dampers
Lock-up function in
selector positions3,
4 and 5.
Steering
Steering _______________________
Power-assisted
steering gear of
rack-piniontypeand
telescopic jointed
steering column
Selector lever positions ____________
Oil capacity, total _________________
Oil type ________________________
P, R, N, D, M
7.6 qts. (7.2 litres)
Saab 3309
Number of turns, lock to lock________
Oil type ________________________
2.97
Clutch type _____________________
Hydraulic plate
clutches, brake
bands and one-way
couplings
Power steering fluid
CHF 11S or
CHF 202
Speed (mph/km/h) at 1000 rpm in top gear:
2.0t and 2.0T _____________________ 28–29/46–47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274
Technical data
Brake system
Disc diameter:
Front ____________________________ 11.14 in.
Foot brake (ABS)_________________
Hydraulic disc
(283 mm) **)
brakes with vacuum
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits;
ventilated discs on
front wheels (some
variants also have
ventilated rear
Front (certain variants only) *) ________ 11.81 in.
(300 mm) **)
Rear ____________________________ 10.94 in. (278 mm)
Rear (certain variants only) *) ________ 11.42 in.
(290 mm) **)
discs).EBDfunction
(see page 167).
Total friction area of brake pads:
Front ____________________________ 9.30 in.² (60 cm²)
Rear ____________________________ 4.96 in.² (32 cm²)
Park brake______________________
Brake fluid ______________________
Acts on rear wheels
To DOT 4.
Do not use DOT 5.
*)15" wheels and 16" aluminium wheels
must not be fitted to these variants since
the diameter of the brake discs does not
allow this.
**) ventilated
Hydraulic unit for soft top, Convertible
Oil capacity_______________________ 0.6 qt. (0.6 l)
Oil type __________________________ CHF 11S
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 275
Wheels and tires
NOTICE
All season tires
Snow chains:
6.5 x 15" _________________________ 205/65 R15 94 H
6.5 x 16" _________________________ 215/55 R16 93 H
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
7 x 17"___________________________ 225/45 R17 94 V
RF/XL
Wheels
Tires
6.5 x 15"_______ 205/65 R15 M+S or
205/65 R15
Summer tires
7 x 17"___________________________ 225/45 R17 94 W
RF/XL
6.5 x 16"_______ 215/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
Always contact a Saab dealer if you plan to fit other wheels or
tires than those fitted as standard.
Contact your Saab dealer regarding suitable snow chains.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Winter (snow) tires:
6.5 x 15" wheel ____________________ 205/65 R15 91 Q
M+S
Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".
6.5 x 16" wheel ____________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q
7 x 17" wheel _____________________ 225/45 R17 94 Q
M+S RF/XL
NOTICE
Compact spare:
Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted for reasons stated on
page 237.
Wheel ___________________________ 4 x 16"
Tire _____________________________ 125/85 R16 99 M
Pressure _________________________ 420 kPa (60 psi)
Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the curb
if the car is heavily laden. This particularly applies to cars with
17" wheels.
Maximum life______________________ 2200 miles
(3500 km)
Permitted wheel offset is 41 mm.
Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276
Technical data
Recommended tire/engine combinations
2.0t
2.0 Turbo
All season tires
205/65 R15 94 H
215/55 R16 93 H
225/45 R17 94 V RF/XL
Summer tires
x
x
x
–
–
x
225/45 R17 94 W RF/XL
Winter (snow) tires
205/65 R15 94 Q
215/55 R16 93 Q
225/45 R17 94 Q RF/XL
Wheel sizes
x
x
x
x
x
–
x
x
6.5 x 15"
x
x
x
–
x
x
6.5 x 16"
7 x 17"
RF/XL = Reinforced (or Extra Load) tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 277
Recommended lowest tire pressure, cold tires
Tire size
Load/speed
mph (km/h)
Front
Rear
*
kPa/psi kPa/psi
All season tires
205/65 R15 94 H
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 220/32 220/32
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 220/32 220/32
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 260/38 260/38
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 220/32
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 280/41 260/38
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
1–5 pers./100– (160–) 280/41 280/41
* Do not exceed posted speed limits.
By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the sur-
rounding air temperature.
The values for tire pressure in table above are for tires at 68°F
(20°C).
Thetirepressurewillincreaseasthetiresbecomewarm(e.g.during
highway driving), and decrease as they cool.
215/55 R16 93 H
225/45 R17 94 V
RF/XL
When the temperature of the tires increases or decreases by 10
degrees the tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease
by 2 psi/10 kPa.
Summer tires
225/45 R17 94 W
RF/XL
1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35
1–5 pers./120– (190–) 280/41 280/41
Winter tires
205/65 R15 91 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 280/41 280/41
215/55 R16 93 Q
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 280/41 280/41
225/45 R17 94 Q
RF/XL
1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 250/36
4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 290/42 290/42
Compact spare
125/85 R16 99 M
Max 50 (80)
420/60 420/60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278
Technical data
Plates and labels
When contacting your Saab dealer it may
sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s
vehicle identification, engine and gearbox
numbers.
1 V.I.N. number and barcode, inside wind-
shield
2 Gearbox number
3 Engine number
4 USA: Label for color codes (trim and
body). Tire information label can be found
on the B-pillar. See also page 243.
Canada: Label for tire pressure and color
codes (trim and body)
5 Certification label
6 Chassis number (stamped on body).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 279
Position:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Vehicle identifi- Y S 3 F D 4 9 Y X 5 1 016584
cation number:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1
2 3 4 5 6 = identification codes for certain chassis components
1
2
3
4
Region ________
Country _______
Manufacturer ___
Product line ____
Y = Northern Europe
S = Sweden
4 = 4-door
6
7
Body version ___
Gearbox _______
7= Convertible
5 = 5-speed manual
6 = 6-speed manual
9 = 5-speed automatic
3 = Saab Automobile AB
F = 9-3
B = 9-3 Linear
D = 9-3 Arc
F = 9-3 Aero
S = 2.0t
8
9
Engine variant __
Check digit_____
5
Model series ___
Y = 2.0 Turbo
0-9 or X
10 Model year ____
11 Factory _______
12 Serial number __
5 = 2005
1 = Trollhättan
6 = Graz
000001-999999
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280
Technical data
Courtesy Headlamp Feature
Several of the systems in your
Saab canbe customized to better
suit your individual needs.
Contact your Saab dealer
• The length of time the lights are on.
• Whether the reversing light or tail lights
should come on as well as the dipped
beam.
Central locking system
Automatic Climate System (ACC)
Some functions are governed by legal
requirements and cannot therefore be
reprogrammed.
Consult a Saab dealer for further informa-
tion.
• To prevent the smell of washer fluid from
entering the car, recirculation can be acti-
vated automatically while the windshield
is washed. The recirculation symbol will
however not light up. This function is
optional; contact a Saab dealer.
Listed below are a number of examples of
programmable functions.
• Convertible: A/C compressor not
switched off when the soft top is open.
• Audibleconfirmationof arming/disarming
the car alarm.
• Automatic unlocking when car stopped
and remote control removed from the igni-
tion switch.
• Trunk lid locked when car driven off or
30 s after being shut.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical data 281
Warning and indications that can
be shown on the SID
Which warnings and indications that can be
shown depends on engine variant and car
specification.
Hot engine.
Make a safe stop.
Run engine on idle.
Key not accepted.
Contact Saab dealer.
Airbag malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Remote control battery
low. Replace battery.
Symbol Text
2: standard key
0: valet key
Key No: 1
Use your seatbelt.
Antilock brake malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Gearbox malfunction.
Limited performance.
Contact Saab dealer.
Lock system failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Brake malfunction.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Gearbox too hot.
Make a safe stop.
Open hood to cool down.
Steering lock malfunc.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Brake fluid level low.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Battery not charging.
Make a safe stop.
Contact Saab dealer.
Steering wheel locked.
Pull out key, turn steering
wheel. Try again.
Release parking brake.
Headlight levelling
malfunction.
Immobilizer failure.
Try starting again.
Contact Saab dealer.
Oil pressure low.
Make a safe stop.
Turn off engine.
Contact Saab dealer.
Tap brakes lightly before
using cruise control.
Theft protection failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Low engine oil level.
Fill oil now.
Traction control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Alarm has been triggered
since being armed.
Engine malfunction.
Contact Saab dealer.
Stability control failure.
Contact Saab dealer.
Rear left seat backrest
unlocked.
Coolant level low.
Refill.
Washer fluid level low.
Refill.
Rear right seat backrest
unlocked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282
Technical data
Parking assistance
Contact Saab dealer.
Left front turn signal
failure.
Parking assistance sensor
interference.
Left rear turn signal
failure.
Right front turn signal
failure.
Close doors.
Right rear turn signal
failure.
Left brake light failure
Left high beam failure.
Left low beam failure.
Rear fog light failure.
Right brake light failure.
Right high beam failure.
Right low beam failure.
Left rear position light
failure.
Right rear position light
failure.
Time for service.
High mounted brake light
failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 283
Braking _______________________ 166
Bulb changing __________________ 213
Bulb table _____________________ 226
Buying new tires ________________ 236
Clutch interlock _________________ 158
Compact spare _________________ 246
Compass ______________________ 139
Condensation water, A/C _________ 106
Convertible _____________________ 55
Convertible, washing _____________ 253
Coolant _______________________ 205
Index
A
A/C __________________________ 106
ABS brakes ____________________ 167
ACC _________________________ 108
Adjustment, steering wheel ________ 122
Air conditioning _________________ 106
Anchorage eyes ________________ 143
Anti-corrosion treatment __________ 254
Antilock braking system __________ 167
Anti-spin ______________________ 169
Ashtrays ______________________ 132
Autochecking of lights, warning and
C
Car alarm ______________________ 50
Care of air conditioning ___________ 257
Change of address notification _____ 264
Changing a tire _________________ 248
Changing bulbs _________________ 213
Changing engine oil _____________ 203
Changing the battery, remote control _ 48
Changing wiper blades ___________ 211
Checking the number of remote
D
Date codes, tires ________________ 246
Deep water, driving through _______ 189
Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 243
Determining correct load, tires _____ 245
Direction indicator stalk switch ______ 98
Direction indicators _______________ 98
Dome light, Convertible ___________ 223
Dome light, Sport Sedan __________ 222
Donor battery, boost starting _______ 193
Door handles ____________________ 42
Door mirrors ___________________ 134
Drive belt ______________________ 210
Drive belt, length ________________ 272
Driver’s seat with memory __________ 20
Driving at night _________________ 190
Driving in cold climates ___________ 181
Driving in deep water _____________ 189
Driving in hot climates ____________ 183
indicator lights __________________ 82
Autodimming _______________ 135, 136
Automatic climate control (ACC) ____ 108
Automatic transmission ___________ 159
controls _______________________ 47
Checks before towing a trailer ______ 187
Child safety _____________________ 22
Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 46
Child seats _____________________ 22
Cigarette lighter _________________ 132
Cleaning the engine bay __________ 252
Cleaning upholstery _____________ 251
Climate control system, manual ____ 103
Closing the soft top manually,
B
Battery ________________________ 208
Bedding-in of new brake pads _____ 157
Before towing a trailer ____________ 187
Brake fluid, grade _______________ 274
Brakes ________________________ 166
Convertible ____________________ 62
Closing the soft top, Convertible _____ 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284
Index
Driving techniques ______________ 179
Driving with a heavy load on hilly
Engine oil, volume _______________ 271
Engine temperature gauge _________ 84
Engine, description ______________ 199
Engine, technical data ____________ 270
Engines _______________________ 271
G
roads ________________________ 161
Driving with a load _______________ 189
Driving with a roof load ___________ 188
Driving with the compact spare wheel 193
Driving with the trunk lid open ______ 189
GDO, garage door opener _________ 136
Gear selector indicator, automatic trans-
mission _______________________ 86
Gearbox number ________________ 278
General safety instructions, Convertible 56
Glovebox ______________________ 132
Glovebox lighting ________________ 224
E
F
ESP, anti-skid system ____________ 171
Easy entry, Convertible ____________ 67
Economical motoring ____________ 179
Electric engine heater ____________ 180
Electric heating, front seats ____ 107, 116
Electric windows ________________ 123
Electric windows, Convertible _______ 71
Electrical system, technical data ____ 272
Electrically adjustable seats ________ 19
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) __ 171
Electronic steering wheel lock ______ 148
Emergency opening of the narrow
Facilitating entry to rear seat,
Convertible ____________________ 67
Factors affecting fuel consumption __ 179
Filler cap ______________________ 154
Filling a portable fuel container _____ 155
Filling up ______________________ 153
Flat spots, tires _________________ 235
Floor jack ______________________ 249
Folding down the rear seat ________ 140
Front fog lights __________________ 98
Front towing eye ________________ 190
Fuel container __________________ 155
Fuel gauge _____________________ 85
Fuel grade _____________________ 271
Fuel information ________________ 155
Functions, car alarm ______________ 53
Fuse panel in luggage compartment _ 230
Fuse table _____________________ 229
Fuses ________________________ 227
Handbrake _____________________ 173
Hazard warning lights _____________ 99
Head restraint, Convertible _________ 68
Head restraints __________________ 21
Headlight flasher _________________ 97
Headlight levelling ________________ 96
Headlights ______________________ 96
Heated door mirrors _____________ 107
Hood _________________________ 198
Horn __________________________ 122
Horn button ____________________ 122
backrest _____________________ 144
Emergency operation of the sunroof _ 128
Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 252
Engine heater __________________ 180
Engine immobilizer _______________ 49
Engine number _________________ 278
Engine oil, checking _____________ 202
Engine oil, grade ________________ 270
I
If a tire goes flat _________________ 240
Ignition switch __________________ 146
Immobilizer _____________________ 49
Important considerations for driving _ 150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 285
Important information, petrol-engined
Lighting in luggage compartment,
Milometer _______________________ 83
Mug holder ____________________ 130
cars with catalytic converters _____ 151
Indicator lights ___________________ 78
Inflation, tires ___________________ 234
Information about fuel ____________ 155
Instrument illumination, adjusting ____ 97
Intermittent malfunctioning, central
Convertible ____________________ 73
Limp-home ____________________ 150
Limp-home, automatic transmission _ 162
Load carriers, roof _______________ 188
Load indices, tires _______________ 242
Loading your vehicle _____________ 243
Locks __________________________ 42
Luggage compartment lighting,
N
New tires, buying ________________ 236
O
ORVR ________________________ 200
Oil capacity, engine ______________ 271
Opening handles _________________ 42
Opening the soft top, Convertible ____ 58
Outside mirrors _________________ 134
Owner assistance _______________ 264
J
Convertible ____________________ 73
Luggage compartment lighting,
changing _____________________ 224
Jump starting __________________ 193
K
M
Key ___________________________ 42
Kick-down _____________________ 161
MAXI fuses ____________________ 228
Main instrument panel _____________ 78
Main/dipped beam ________________ 97
Maintenance schedule ___________ 262
Manual climate control ___________ 103
Manual gear selection ____________ 164
Manual gearbox ________________ 158
Manual tripping of car alarm ________ 52
Materials used in the car, reclamation 256
Memory, driver’s seat _____________ 20
Messages on SID, Convertible ______ 65
P
Panic function, car alarm ___________ 52
Park Brake Shift Lock ____________ 160
Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary
L
LATCH (child safety) ______________ 23
Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 241
Labels and plates, location ________ 278
Lashing eyes ___________________ 143
Laying the car up _______________ 175
Leather upholstery, cleaning _______ 251
override ______________________ 162
Parking _______________________ 173
Parking aid ____________________ 176
Parking brake __________________ 173
Parking on a hill _________________ 174
Pinch protection, electric windows __ 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286
Index
Pinch protection, sunroof _________ 128
Plates and labels, location ________ 278
Polishing and waxing ____________ 253
Poly-V-belt ____________________ 210
Portable fuel container ___________ 155
Position lights ___________________ 96
Power steering fluid, checking _____ 207
Pressure, tires __________________ 234
Recommendations for automatic
transmission, towing a trailer _____ 185
Recommendations for manual
Seatbelts, checking ______________ 251
Seats __________________________ 17
Securing a load _________________ 143
Sentronic, manual gear selection ___ 164
Service costs ___________________ 263
Service information ______________ 264
Service intervals ________________ 262
Speed ratings, tires ______________ 242
Speedometer ____________________ 83
Starting the engine ______________ 148
Steering wheel adjustment ________ 122
Steering wheel lock ______________ 148
Steps for determining correct load
gearbox, towing a trailer _________ 186
Recommended snow chains _______ 275
Refueling ______________________ 153
Remote control __________________ 42
Replacement, wheel _____________ 239
Reversing lights __________________ 99
Rollover Pop-up Bars, Convertible ___ 70
Roof lighting ___________________ 129
Roof lighting, changing ___________ 222
Running-in _____________________ 157
Q
Quality grading, tires _____________ 238
Quick guide, remote control ________ 43
limit _________________________ 245
Storage compartments ___________ 132
Sun visor ______________________ 130
Sunroof _______________________ 126
Switches _______________________ 96
S
R
SAHR, head restraint _____________ 21
SDM _________________________ 266
SID ___________________________ 87
SPA __________________________ 176
Saab Information Display __________ 87
Saab Parking Assistance _________ 176
Saab Trionic engine management
Rain sensor ____________________ 101
Raising the soft top manually,
Convertible ____________________ 62
Reading lights, Convertible _________ 72
Rear fog light ____________________ 98
Rear seats, folding down _________ 140
Rear towing eye ________________ 191
Rear window heating ____________ 107
Rearview mirrors ________________ 134
Recirculation ___________________ 106
T
TCS __________________________ 169
Technical data __________________ 268
Textile carpeting, cleaning _________ 252
Tie down eyes __________________ 143
Tightening torque, wheels _________ 250
system _______________________ 200
Safety belts _____________________ 12
Seatbelts _______________________ 12
Seatbelts in rear seat, Convertible ___ 69
Seatbelts, care _________________ 251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index 287
Tire chains ____________________ 240
Tire date code __________________ 246
Tire inspection and rotation ________ 235
Tire markings __________________ 242
Tire sidewall labeling _____________ 241
Tire sizes ______________________ 275
Tire terminology and definitions ____ 243
Tire, spare _____________________ 246
Tires _________________________ 234
Towbar _______________________ 184
Towbar load ___________________ 186
Towing _______________________ 190
Towing a trailer _________________ 184
Towing the car _________________ 191
Traction Control System (TCS) _____ 169
Transmission oil, checking ________ 204
Transmission oil, grade ___________ 272
Transmission, automatic __________ 159
Transmission, manual ____________ 158
Transporting the car _____________ 192
Treadwear indicators ____________ 236
Trip computer ___________________ 88
Trip meter ______________________ 83
Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC _____ 257
Trunk lid, driving when open _______ 189
Trunk lid, opening ________________ 45
Turbo gauge ____________________ 84
What Will You See After an Airbag
U
Inflates? _______________________ 37
Wheel replacement ______________ 239
Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 275
When it is time for new tires _______ 236
Windshield washers _____________ 100
Windshield wipers _______________ 100
Winter driving __________________ 181
Wipers ________________________ 100
Uniform tire quality grading ________ 238
Upholstery care _________________ 251
Upholstery, cleaning _____________ 251
Useful tips on night driving ________ 190
Useful tips on starting ____________ 149
Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 266
Vehicle identification number ______ 278
Vehicle recovery ________________ 192
X
Xenon headlights ________________ 214
Xenon headlights, head light levelling _ 96
W
Warning labels ___________________ 7
Warning lights ___________________ 78
Warning triangle _________________ 99
Warnings and messages on SID,
Convertible ____________________ 65
Washer fluid ___________________ 211
Washer jets ____________________ 212
Washers ______________________ 100
Washing ______________________ 252
Washing a Convertible ___________ 253
Waxing and polishing ____________ 253
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288
Notes
Notes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel
3 Brake/clutch fluid
Top up as necessary with
Recommended octane rating:
Unleaded
DOT 4 brake fluid.
Do not use DOT 5 fluid.
gasoline
87–93 AON
For optimum performance
Saab recommends:
4 Battery
• 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.
• 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.
5 Fuse panel
Fuel tank
capacity:
16.05 g
(61 l)
6 Washer fluid
7 Power steering
IMPORTANT: Do not overfill.
Steering-servo oil, CHF 11S
(P/N 8996860). Use GM Power
Steering Fluid to top up in emer-
gency.
The level must not come up into
the fuel filler pipe because the
fuel must have room to expand.
1 Engine oil
For information see chapter
"Technical data".
2 Coolant
8 Dipstick, engine oil
See section "Car care" regard-
ing engine oil level.
When the engine is cold, the
coolant must not lie above the
KALT/COLD mark on the
expansion tank (boundary
between the upper and lower
sections of the tank.
Top up with a mixture of equal
parts of Saab-approved anti-
freeze and clean water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTICE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be required more
frequently if the car is being used under certain conditions, see
section "Customer Assistance and Information".
Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
US/CA MY2005 Ordering nr. 42 92 17.
Printed in Sweden on chlorine-free paper 2004-04.
© Copyright Saab Automobile AB, 2004.
All information and illustrations in this manual are based on the specifi-
cations that were available at the time of printing. Model variants, tech-
nical data and equipment vary from market to market, and may be
altered without prior notice.
Note that illustrations in this manual can depict cars fitted with extra
equipment. Your Saab dealer will be pleased to inform you of the exact
specifacations that apply to your market.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|